Pioneer lx01bd Owner Manual


Add to my manuals
116 Pages

advertisement

Pioneer lx01bd Owner Manual | Manualzz

LX01BD_1.book Page 1 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Operating Instructions

Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer

Satellite Speaker

Blu-ray Disc Player

Accessory Box

SX-LX70SW

SSP-LX70ST

SBDP-LX08

AS-LX71

Blu-ray Disc Home Cinema System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 2 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.

Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.

After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

IMPORTANT

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

"dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR

BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS

INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1-1_En-A

CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.

To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.

Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.

The following caution label appears on your unit.

Location: inside of the Blu-ray disc player

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En

D3-4-2-1-8*_C_En

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

D3-4-2-1-3_B_En

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following

section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

D3-4-2-1-4_A_En

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.

Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the

AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time

(for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 3 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal.

The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En

This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive

2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.

D3-4-2-1-9a_A_En

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

K041_En

POWER-CORD CAUTION

Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement.

S002*_En

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain

U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.

Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

WARNING

To prevent injury, the receiver subwoofer must be securely attached to the floor in accordance with this operating instructions.

For U.K model:

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

Blue : Neutral Brown : Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ;

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 4 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries

Symbol for equipment

Symbol examples for batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

For countries outside the European Union:

If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Pb

K058a_A1_En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 5 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Contents

Section One

What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

01 Speaker Setup Guide

Safety precautions when setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Preparing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Using the supplied speaker bases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

When not using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Connect the speaker system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

02 Connecting up

Receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Display unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

03 Controls and displays

Display unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Operating the receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Operating the supplied Blu-ray disc player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Operating Pioneer Flat Screen TV and TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Operating a Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Operating a Pioneer DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

04 Before you start

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound . . . . 26

Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Operating the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Using the LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Watching a Blu-ray disc/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

05 Listening to your system

Effective Sound

(for optimum sound). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Center image setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Using Advanced Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Genre Sync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Listening with MCACC Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes . . . . . . . . . .33

Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Adjusting sound delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

06 Listening to the radio

Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Improving poor AM sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Changing the noise cut mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Displaying RDS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

07 Surround sound settings

Using the Sound Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

LFE Attenuate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

08 Other connections

Using this unit for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Audio input settings from TVs (TV Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Connecting auxiliary components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Connecting for digital audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Connecting an analog audio component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Connecting external antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

HDMI mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Setting the Auto Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

5

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 6 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

09 HDMI Control

Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

10 Additional information

Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Section Two

Operating instructions for

Blu-ray disc player (SBDP-LX08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

6

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 7 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

What’s in the box

Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.

Accessory box (AS-LX71):

• Remote control (page 18)

• AA/LR6 alkaline batteries x4 (page 25)

• Power cords x2 (page 15)

• Display unit (page 16)

• AM loop antenna (page 13)

• FM wire antenna (page 13)

• Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 26)

• HDMI cables x2 (page 14, 43, 45)

• Control cable (page 14)

• Display cable (page 13)

• Optical digital cable (page 14)

• iPod cable (page 42)

• Warranty card

• Setup Guide

• These operating instructions

Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70SW) box:

• Cleaning cloth

Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box:

• Speakers (front/center x2, surround x2) (page 8, 13)

• Speaker cables x6 (page 13)

• Speaker bases x4 (page 8)

• Non-skid pads x16 (page 8, 9)

• Screws x4 (page 8)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

7

En

LX01BD_1.book Page 8 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

01

Chapter 1

Speaker Setup Guide

Safety precautions when setting up

Preparing the speakers

When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers.

Home theater sound setup

This unit comes with speaker bases that can be used to adjust the speakers to the design of the room in which they are placed.

Using the supplied speaker bases

1 Attach the non-skid pads to the speaker bases, as shown below.

Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker base.

Depending on the size and characteristics of your room, you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this system.

Standard surround setup

This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.

Front/center (L) Front/center (R)

Receiver subwoofer

Non-skid pads x16

Each speaker base

2 Attach the speaker bases.

Place the speaker atop a supplied speaker base, and fix the base in place by using one of the supplied screws.

• The supplied speaker bases come in two different shapes. You can determine the correct base for a speaker by checking if the screw’s location lines up correctly when the speaker is placed atop the base. (There are specific bases for the front/center (L) and surround speaker (R), and for the front/center (R) and surround speaker (L), with two of each type included.)

Speaker

Listening position

Surround (L)

Front surround setup

Surround (R)

This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker placement isn’t possible or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup together with the Front Stage

Surround Advance modes in page 32.

Surround (L)

Front/center (L)

Surround (R)

Front/center (R)

Screw

Speaker base

Receiver subwoofer

Listening position

8

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 9 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

When not using the supplied speaker bases

Additional notes on speaker placement

Attach the non-skid pads to the base of each of the front/ center and surround speakers (as shown).

Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base of each speaker.

Non-skid pads x16

Front/center and surround speakers

Connect the speaker system

Refer to Basic connections on page 12 to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound. After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 26) to complete your surround sound setup.

• Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV.

• When using the Standard surround setup, install the surround speakers slightly above ear level for optimum effect.

• When using the Front surround setup, separate the left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum effect.

Precautions:

• Do not place the speaker on an unstable surface, as doing so may cause the speaker to fall and cause damage or bodily injury.

• All speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if a speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set.

• For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.

• Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier.

This may result in malfunction or fire.

• Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system.

• The speaker system grill cannot be removed. Do not try to forcibly remove it since doing so may damage the grille.

• When cleaning the cabinet, use the provided cleaning cloth.

Do not allow alcohol, thinner, benzene, or insecticides to come into contact with the surface, since finish discoloration may occur.

Also, when using chemically impregnated cleaning cloths, follow their precautions carefully.

01

9

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 10 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

02

Chapter 2

Connecting up

Receiver subwoofer

10

En

OUT

Rear panel

IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

OUT

IN 3 HDMI

IN 2

IN 1

SYSTEM

OUT 1 OUT 2

CONTROL

IN 1 IN 2

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Side panel

ANTENNA

AM LOOP

L

R

ANALOG

AUDIO IN

R

FRONT

R

CENTER

L L

FRONT

R L

SURROUND SUBWOOFER AC IN

SYSTEM

1

Rear panel

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 HDMI OUT terminal

Connect to a television that has an HDMI terminal.

2 HDMI IN terminals (x3)

Use high-quality audio/video connection with compatible HDMI devices. Connect the included Blu-ray disc player to HDMI IN 1 .

To select this input, choose HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 .

3 SYSTEM connector

Connect to the display unit.

Side panel

• There is a cover over the connectors on the side panel.

A. When making connections, lift the two hooks and remove the cover.

B. Once connections are finished, line up the three positions and place the cover back in its original position.

B

4 CONTROL OUT jacks (x2)

Connect the supplied Blu-ray disc player to the CONTROL OUT 1 jack with the supplied control cable. You can connect another component to the other Control Out jack.

5 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN jacks (x2)

To listen to optical digital audio, change the input to Digital 1 or

Digital 2 .

When the digital output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks, set ‘ TV Input ’ (see page 40).

6 AM LOOP antenna terminal

7 FM antenna socket

8 ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks

Handle sound from an external component by using stereo audio code. To listen to analog audio, change the input to Analog .

When the analog output jacks of your TV are connected to these jacks, set ‘ TV Input ’ (see page 40).

9 SPEAKERS terminals

Match the colors of the speaker cords to their respective connectors.

10 AC IN – Power inlet

A

Important

• You must connect the supplied Blu-ray disc player with a control cable. If not, the Blu-ray disc player may not operate properly.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 11 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Display unit

SYSTEM

F.AUDIO

iPod

DISPLAY UNIT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

1 2 3 4

1 SYSTEM connector

Connect to the receiver subwoofer.

2 F.AUDIO input

To listen to audio from an external component, connect with a stereo mini-plug cable. Once connected, the input automatically changes to Front Audio In .

3 iPod input terminal

Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source.

When you connect an iPod, the input automatically changes to iPod .

4 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone for the Auto MCACC setup

(see page 26).

Blu-ray disc player

1 2 3 4

R

AUDIO OUT ( 2 ch )

L

L

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER

R

AUDIO OUT ( 7.1 ch ) SUB WOOFER

CONTROL

IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

Y

P

B

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

P

R

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AC IN

7 6

1 AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals

Connect with the audio input terminals on a TV or tape recorder, etc.

2 AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals

Connect with the 7.1 channel audio input terminals on an AV receiver or amplifier, etc.

3 VIDEO OUT terminals

VIDEO – Connect with the video input terminal on a TV.

S-VIDEO – Connect with the S-Video input terminal on a TV.

COMPONENT VIDEO – Connect with the component video input terminals on a TV.

4 AC IN

Connect the power cord here.

5 HDMI OUT terminal

Connect to the HDMI IN 1 jack of the receiver subwoofer with the supplied HDMI cable.

5

6 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack

Connect with the digital audio input terminal on the other audio component.

7 CONTROL IN terminal

Connect to the CONTROL OUT 1 jack of the receiver subwoofer using the supplied control cable.

Caution

• Be sure to connect cables for outputting the audio and video signals (page 91, 94).

02

11

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 12 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

02

Basic connections

Receiver subwoofer

Display unit

OUT IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

SYSTEM

F.AUDIO

iPod

DISPLAY UNIT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

INPUT

SYSTEM

Rear panel

1

SYSTEM

Display cable

2

AM loop antenna

3

FRONT-L

FM antenna

ANTENNA

AM LOOP

Side panel

L

R

ANALOG

AUDIO IN

R

FRONT

R

CENTER

L L

FRONT

R L

SURROUND SUB

4

CENTER-L

Front/center speaker (L)

Front/center speaker (R)

Important

• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.

After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

WARNING

• Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation, insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural disasters.

12

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

Surround speaker (L)

SURROUND-L

Listening position

Surround speaker (R)

SURROUND-R

LX01BD_1.book Page 13 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

1 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer.

Plug the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM connector on the receiver subwoofer.

4 Connect each speaker.

• Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at one end and two wires at the other end.

Color-coded wire

(Connect to speaker)

02

Caution

• Do not attempt to attach the display unit to the wall.

2 Assemble the AM loop antenna.

a b c

Color-coded connector

(Connect to receiver subwoofer)

• Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.

a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow.

b. Clip the loop onto the stand.

c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws.

It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws.

3 Connect the AM and FM antennas.

a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal.

For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure.

2

3

1

• Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the illustration can be identified by means of the color-coded indicator provided on the rear-surface model label. Match the color-coded wire with the color indicator on the model label, then insert the color-coded wire into the red ( + ) side and the other wire into the black ( – ) side.

Black ( – ) Red ( + )

Color-coded wire

• Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the side of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely.

Be careful when inserting the speaker plug, as it must be inserted in the proper direction when being plugged into one of the terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly.

b. Push the FM antenna plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket.

Note

• Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and Blu-ray disc player.

• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 34 or

Connecting external antennas on page 42.

• Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 44.

• Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.

• If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by reinserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.

• For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.

• To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.

Caution

• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage . To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

• Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system.

• Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire.

• After connecting the plugs, pull lightly on the cables to make sure that the ends of the cables are securely connected to the terminals. Poor connections can create noise and interruptions in the sound.

• If the cables’ wires happen to be pushed out of the terminals, allowing the wires to come into contact with each other, it places an excessive additional load on the amp. This may cause the amp to stop functioning, and may even damage the amp.

13

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 14 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

02

R

AUDIO OUT ( 2 ch )

L

L

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER

R

AUDIO OUT ( 7.1 ch ) SUB WOOFER

CONTROL

IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

Y

P

B

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

P

R

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

5

Receiver subwoofer

Side panel Rear panel

OUT IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

OUT 1 OUT 2

CONTROL

IN 1 IN 2

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

SYSTEM

6

To HDMI input

7

From digital audio output (optical)

AC IN

Blu-ray disc player

5 Connect the Blu-ray disc player to the receiver subwoofer.

a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT 1 jack on the side of the receiver subwoofer.

Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN jack on the rear of the Blu-ray disc player.

b. Plug the HDMI cable into the HDMI IN 1 jack on the rear of the receiver subwoofer.

Plug the other end of the cable into the HDMI OUT jack on the rear of the Blu-ray disc player.

TV

-

7 Connect an audio cable from your TV to the receiver subwoofer.

• To listen to TV audio on this unit, connect the TV’s audio output to DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 on the receiver subwoofer.

To use the HDMI Control function when you are connected to a supported Pioneer Flat Screen TV, you must connect via HDMI.

• You must first set ‘ TV Input ’ to switch the audio from a Flat

Screen TV with the HDMI Control function or to switch the input source of this unit to TV audio and operate your TV with the supplied remote control. For more information, see Operating

Pioneer Flat Screen TV and TVs on page 21 and Audio input settings from TVs (TV Input) on page 40.

Note that unless the control cable is connected, you can’t use the remote control with the Blu-ray disc player.

14

En

6 Connect the receiver subwoofer to your TV.

• Connect the HDMI OUT jack on receiver subwoofer to an HDMI input on your TV.

• You can have audio from the receiver subwoofer, as well as audio and video from the Blu-ray disc player, output to your TV by connecting with a single HDMI cable.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 15 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Note

• When digital connections are used, it may be necessary to adjust the digital audio output settings on the TV. For details, consult the operating instructions for your TV.

• About the different types of Blu-ray disc players:

– Use the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) and AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals to connect a separately sold receiver and listen to 2-channel or

7.1-channel sound, respectively.

– Use the VIDEO OUT terminals to connect to a TV not equipped with an HDMI terminal.

8 Connect the power cord.

• Connect each power cord to the AC inlet on the Blu-ray disc player and the receiver subwoofer. Connect each power cord to a wall socket in the following order:

1. Blu-ray disc player

2. Receiver subwoofer

3. TV

AC IN

Blu-ray disc player

To AC outlet

Receiver subwoofer

To AC outlet

• Run the cords that are connected to the side panel of the receiver subwoofer over the back side of the unit, and replace the cover on the side panel.

Note

• Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.

• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.

• After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

02

15

En

LX01BD_1.book Page 16 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

03

Chapter 3

Controls and displays

Display unit

1 2 3

Top buttons

4 5

1  STANDBY/ON

Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on/into standby.

2 INPUT SELECTOR (page 42)

Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs ( HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 , Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , iPod or Front Audio In ).

3 VOL +/– buttons

Use to adjust the volume.

4 POWER ON indicator (Blue)

6 7

5 Front panel display

See below for details.

6 IR remote sensor (page 25)

7 HDMI indicator (Red)

Lights when this receiver subwoofer is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.

Also lights during initialization, after you plug this unit into an AC outlet.

Display

16

En

1 2

DIRECT STEREO F.S.SURR.

ADV.SURR.

2

PRO LOGIC

2

DIGITAL

DTS 96/24

DSD PCM

3 4 5 6

LOUDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIALOG HDMI THROUGH

QUIET TONE S.RTRV MCACC

7

8

1 DIRECT

Lights when Direct Sound is selected (i.e. Effective Sound is off)

(page 30).

2 Listening mode indicators

STEREO

Lights when the Stereo mode is selected or when a stereo source is being played back in the Auto listening mode (page 32).

F.S.SURR.

Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround Advance listening modes is selected (page 32).

ADV.SURR.

Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 31).

9 10 11

3 2 PRO LOGIC II

Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 31).

4 Sound processing indicators

Lights when any of the Loudness, Midnight, Quiet or tone controls feature is selected (page 33).

5 S.RTRV

Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 32).

6 HDMI THROUGH

Lights when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode .

7 MCACC

Lights when MCACC Effect is switched on (page 33).

Blinks during Auto MCACC Setup (page 26).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 17 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

8 Digital format indicators

2 DIGITAL

Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 30).

DTS

Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 30).

DTS 96/24

Lights during playback of a DTS 96/24 decoding (page 30).

DSD  PCM

Lights during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.

PCM

Lights during playback of PCM signals.

9 Character display

10 Tuner indicators

Lights when a broadcast is being received.

Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

Lights when FM mono reception is selected.

Lights when in one of the RDS display or search modes.

11

Lights when sleep timer is active (page 48).

03

Blu-ray disc player

2 HDMI indicator

This lights when an HDMI-compatible device is connected (page 91).

3 4 5 6

5  OPEN/CLOSE

Press to open and close the disc tray.

6  PLAY

Press to start playback.

7  STOP

Press to stop playback.

3 Disc tray

1 2

• Controls hidden behind the front panel door.

1  STANDBY/ON

Press to switch the Blu-ray disc player on/into standby.

8 Front panel display

4 FL OFF indicator

This lights when Off is selected with FL DIMMER .

7

Display

8

1 2 3

CONTROL

PQLS

24HZ

50HZ

60HZ

6 5

1 

Lights during playback.

2 

Lights when playback is paused.

3 PQLS

Lights when the PQLS function is activated (page 92).

Caution: This receiver subwoofer does not support the PQLS function.

4

4 Character display

Displays the title/chapter/track number, elapsed time, etc.

5 24HZ/50HZ/60HZ

The frequency of the video frame or field being output lights.

6 CONTROL

Lights when the HDMI Control function is activated (page 92).

17

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 18 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

03

Remote control

18

En

• For more information on using the remote control, see Operating the remote control on page 27.

Operating the receiver subwoofer

This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver subwoofer. Note that the controls change when you have chosen the input function for separate connected devices, such as an Blu-ray disc player.

1

4

5

6

8

9

6

11

12

ON

HDMI 1

BD

SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

OFF

TV

FM / AM

DISPLAY

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

GUIDE

TV

VOL

15

SURR

SYSTEM

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

16

GENRE

20

MCACC

17

SOUND

RTRV

19

LINE

21

TEST

TONE

23

SLEEP

18

DIRECT

22

SOUND

24

EXIT

PAGE

SYSTEM

VOL

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

INFO

MUTE

SYSTEM

CONTROL

13

14

2

3

7

10

1 SYSTEM ON

Switches the receiver subwoofer and Blu-ray disc player to On

2 SYSTEM OFF

Switches the receiver subwoofer and Blu-ray disc player to Off

(Standby).

3 TV INPUT

Select an input source of the TV.

TV 

Switches the TV to On/Standby.

4 INPUT SELECT buttons

Change the input for the receiver subwoofer. You will also need to press one of these buttons when operating another connected component via this remote control.

BD (HDMI 1)

Switches the input to the included Blu-ray disc player ( BD ) connected to HDMI 1 .

The remote control switches to the Blu-ray disc player operating mode.

DVR (HDMI 2)

Switches the input to the HDD/DVD recorder ( DVR ) connected to HDMI 2 (when a separately sold Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder is connected).

The remote control switches to the HDD/DVD recorder operating mode.

The HDD/DVD recorder’s power can be switched between on and standby using the  button below.

DVD (HDMI 3)

Switches the input to the DVD player ( DVD ) connected to HDMI 3

(when a separately sold Pioneer DVD player is connected).

The remote control switches to the DVD player operating mode.

The DVD player’s power can be switched between on and standby using the  button below.

TV

Switches to the input selected at TV Input setup (page 40).

FM/AM

Switches between FM and AM bands (page 34).

5 LCD touch screen

Displays the buttons used to control external components such as a receiver subwoofer ( SYSTEM ), Blu-ray disc player ( BD ), Flat

Screen TV ( PDP ), HDD/DVD recorder ( DVR ) and DVD player ( DVD ).

The current operating mode is displayed at the top of the remote control’s screen.

Although the LCD touch screen disappears if you do not perform any operations for a while, it appears when the screen is touched or a button on the remote control is pressed.

6 Other component button

Use to operate the Blu-ray disc player or other connected component.

7 LIGHT

The LCD touch screen’s illumination turns on and off each time the button is pressed.

The illumination automatically turns off after 30 seconds. When turned off by pressing the button, the display turns off one minute later.

8

///

(cursor buttons) and ENTER

Use to control receiver functions.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 19 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

9 SETUP

Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 34, 37, 40, 48).

10 RETURN

Use to cancel settings.

11 TV VOL +/–

Use to adjust the volume of the TV.

12 SYSTEM VOL +/–

Use to adjust the volume of the receiver subwoofer.

13 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted

(adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

14 SYSTEM CONTROL

Use to switch to the receiver subwoofer operating mode ( SYSTEM ) when this unit is in the other operating modes. Press again to return to the previous operating mode.

LCD touch screen

15 SURR

Use to select a Surround mode (page 30).

ADV.SURR

Use to change the audio setting to Pioneer’s original Advanced

Surround mode (page 31).

F.S.SURR

Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode (page 32).

16 GENRE

Use to listen to audio in Genre Sync mode (page 32). (This button is displayed only when the SYSTEM screen is shown during HDD/DVD recorder operation.)

17 SOUND RTRV

Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources

(page 32).

18 DIRECT

Use to switch on/off the Effective Sound mode (page 30).

19 LINE

Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver subwoofer’s audio inputs ( Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , iPod or Front Audio In )

(page 42).

20 MCACC

Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 26).

21 TEST TONE

Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 39).

22 SOUND

Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc.

23 SLEEP

Press to set the sleep timer (page 48).

24 EXIT

Cancel settings and exit the SYSTEM screen.

Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner

6

-

7

-

FM/AM

5

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

TUNE

CLEAR

+

ST

+

1

DISPLAY

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

PAGE

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

2

3

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

4

1 DISPLAY

Use to display RDS information (page 35).

2

///

(cursor buttons) and ENTER

Use to control FM/AM tuner functions.

3 SETUP

Use to access the menu system or tuner settings (page 34, 35).

4 RETURN

Use to cancel settings.

LCD touch screen

5 Number buttons

Use to directly choose a preset radio station.

CLEAR

Press to clear an entry and start again.

6 TUNE +/–

Use to find radio frequencies (page 34).

7 ST +/–

Use to select a station preset (page 35).

03

19

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 20 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

03

Operating the supplied Blu-ray disc player

1

2

3

5

6

8

9

BD 1/2

DISPLAY

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

10

11

HMG

13

2nd

AUDIO

14

2nd

VIDEO

12

MENU

15

OPEN/

CLOSE

PAGE

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

PAGE /

4

7

BD 2/2

16

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CLEAR

0

ENTER

17

PLAY

MODE

19

FL

DIMMER

18

VIDEO

ADJ

20

VIDEO

SEL

21

RESO-

LUTION

20

En

1 PAGE </>

Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present.

2 DISPLAY

Press to display the disc information (page 70).

3 TOP MENU

Press to display the top menu of the BD-ROM or DVD-Video.

4 TOOLS

Press to display/hide the TOOLS menu (page 64).

5

///

(cursor buttons) and ENTER

Use to select items, change settings and move the cursor.

Press ENTER to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc.

6 HOME MENU

Press to display/hide the Home Menu.

7 RETURN

Press to return to the previous screen.

8 Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons

Use these to navigate BD-ROM menus.

LCD touch screen

9 ( AUDIO )

Press to switch the audio streams/channels (page 70).

( SUBTITLE )

Press to switch the subtitles (page 69).

( ANGLE )

Press to switch the BD-ROM or DVD-Video camera angles

(page 69).

10 Playback controls

Press to start playback.

Press to stop playback.

Press to pause playback. Press again to restart playback.

 , 

Press to skip to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/ track/file (page 68).

 , 

Press to start reverse/forward scanning (page 68).

 / , / 

Use for slow motion and step frame (page 68, 69).

11 HMG

Press to display/hide the Home Media Gallery screen (page 75).

12 MENU

Press to display the BD-ROM or DVD-Video menus.

13 2nd AUDIO

When playing a BD-ROM on which secondary audio is recorded, press to switch to the secondary audio (page 70).

14 2nd VIDEO

When playing a BD-ROM on which secondary video (Picture-in-

Picture) is recorded, press to switch to the secondary video

(page 70).

15 OPEN/CLOSE

Press to open and close the disc tray.

16 Number buttons

Use these to select and play the title/chapter/track you want to watch or listen to and to select items from menus.

ENTER

Press to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc.

CLEAR

Press to clear the numeric number, etc.

17 PLAY MODE

Press to display/hide the Play Mode screen (page 71).

18 VIDEO ADJ

Press to display/hide the Video Adjust menu (page 79).

19 FL DIMMER

Press to switch the brightness of the player’s front panel display. The

FL OFF indicator lights when Off is selected.

20 VIDEO SEL

Press to switch the player’s terminal from which the video signals are output. Use to switch between digital output (HDMI output) and analog output (Component Video output, S-Video output or Video output) (the signals are only output from the selected video output terminal) (page 65).

21 RESOLUTION /

Use these to switch the output video resolution from the player’s

HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals (page 65).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 21 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Operating Pioneer Flat Screen TV and TVs

03

First, refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 49 for information about setting up your TV’s presets. Note that certain buttons may not work with some TVs.

TELETEXT-related buttons can only be used with Pioneer Flat Screen

TVs.

1

ON SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

HDMI 1 HDMI 2

BD DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

OFF

TV

FM / AM

PDP 1/2

12

1 2 3

4 5 6

Shown when not set to a Pioneer Flat Screen TV.

TV 1/2

1 2 3

18

PDP 2/2

19 20

21 22 23

24 25 26

7 8

13

TV/

DTV

14

+

P

-

9

0

15

INPUT

16

MUTE

17

+

TV VOL

-

PAGE /

28 29

27

EXIT

17

+

16

MUTE

TV VOL

-

2

3

DISPLAY

PAGE

LIGHT

TOP MENU TOOLS

4

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

5

6

8

9

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

7

GUIDE

TV

SYSTEM

INFO 10

11

VOL

VOL MUTE

SYSTEM

CONTROL

1 TV INPUT

Select an input source of the TV.

TV 

Switches the TV to On/Standby.

2 PAGE </>

Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present.

3 DISPLAY

Displays the channel information.

4 TOOLS

Displays the TOOLS Menu.

5

///

(cursor buttons) and ENTER

Selects a desired item on the setting screen. Press ENTER to executes a command.

6 HOME MENU

Displays the HOME MENU screen.

7 RETURN

Restores the previous menu screen.

8 Color (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons

Controls a BD player for HDMI Control functions only.

9 GUIDE

Displays the Electronic Program Guide in DTV/SAT (Satellite) input mode.

10 INFO

Displays the channel information.

11 TV VOL +/–

Use to adjust the volume of the TV.

LCD touch screen

12 Number buttons

TV/External input mode: Selects a channel.

Teletext mode: Selects a page.

13 TV/DTV (For Pioneer Flat Screen TV only)

Switches the mode among TV and DTV.

14 P +/–

TV/External input mode: Selects a channel.

15 INPUT

Selects an input source of the Flat Screen TV.

16 MUTE

Mutes the sound.

17 TV VOL +/–

Sets the volume.

The following only apply to Pioneer Flat Screen TVs:

18

Jumps to Teletext subtitle page.

19

Displays hidden characters.

20

Selects the Teletext mode (all TV image, all TEXT image, TV/TEXT image).

21

Displays the channel information.

22

TV/External input mode: Freezes a frame from a moving image.

Press again to cancel the function.

23

Selects the screen size.

24

Displays an Index page for the CEEFAX/FLOF format. Displays a TOP

Over View page for the TOP format.

21

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 22 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

03

25

Teletext mode: Stops updating Teletext pages. Press again to release the hold mode.

27 EXIT

Press to exit the channel information

26

Teletext mode: Switches Teletext images. (full/upper half/lower half)

28

Teletext mode: Selects a page.

29

Sets the sound multiplex mode.

Operating a Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder

1

HDMI 1 HDMI 2

BD DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

FM / AM

22

En

12

HDD/

DVD

DVR 1/3

13

JUKE

BOX

14

P.LIVE

TV

15

  

16

CM

BACK

CM

SKIP

17

REC

19

HELP

STOP

REC

18

REC

MODE

20

TIMER

REC

21

TIMER

ON/OFF

PAGE /

2

3

4

DISPLAY

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

PAGE

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

5

6

7

9

10

HOME

MENU

SETUP

GUIDE

SYSTEM

RETURN

INFO

8

11

1  (DVR)

Switches the power for an HDD/DVD recorder to On/Standby.

2 PAGE </>

Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present.

3 DISPLAY

Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.

4 TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR

Press to display the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW

(Video) disc is loaded, or the Disc Navigator screen.

5 MENU

Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW

(Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.

When in the GUIDE Plus+

®

system, use to jump directly to the

Menu bar.

DVR 2/3

22

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

23

A.TV/

D.TV

0

24

TV/

DVD

25

INPUT

19 26

HELP TEXT

CLEAR

27

+

CH

-

PAGE /

28

DVR 3/3

29

O.T.

COPY

6

///

(cursor buttons) and ENTER

Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option.

While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the Channel List screen.

7 HOME MENU

Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate many functions of the system.

8 RETURN

Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display.

Also press to exit the MHEG application.

9 GUIDE Plus+

®

Action buttons

Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each button will be described on-screen, and changes depending on the screen being displayed.

10 GUIDE

Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 23 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

11 INFO

While watching D.TV, press to display information banner.

LCD touch screen

12 HDD/DVD

Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording and playback.

13 JUKEBOX

Press to display the Jukebox screen of an HDD/DVD recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for playback.

14 P.LIVE TV

Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.

15 Playback controls

Press to start playback.

Press to stop playback.

Press to pause playback or recording.

 / 

Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/track; or to display the previous or next menu page.

When GUIDE Plus+

®

is displayed, use to display the previous/ next page.

 /   ,  /  

Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed.

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Press repeatedly to change the playback speed.

While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction.

When GUIDE Plus+

®

is displayed, use to display the previous/ next day.

16 CM BACK (commercial back)

Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing.

CM SKIP (commercial skip)

Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing.

17 Recording controls

 REC

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins.

When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE Plus+

®

screen, use for One-Button-Record.

STOP REC

Press to stop recording.

18 REC MODE

Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality).

19 HELP

Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.

20 TIMER REC

Press to set a timer recording.

21 TIMER ON/OFF

This button cannot be used for an HDD/DVD recorder.

22 Number buttons

Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on.

CLEAR

Press to clear an entry and start again.

23 A.TV/D.TV

Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV

and D.TV

indicators on the front panel show which is selected.

24 TV/DVD

Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the system’s tuner (or an external input).

25 INPUT

Press to change an HDD/DVD recorder input to use for recording.

26 TEXT

Press to display Teletext information (in European countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG application display (UK only) if available during digital broadcasts.

27 CHANNEL +/–

Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.

28 ( AUDIO )

Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.)

( SUBTITLE )

Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual

DVD-Video discs.

While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV subtitles.

( ANGLE )

Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes.

29 O.T. COPY

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.

03

23

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 24 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

03

Operating a Pioneer DVD player

1

HDMI 1

BD

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

TV

FM / AM

9

DVD 1/2

10

 

11

ZOOM

PAGE /

DVD 2/2

12

1 2 3

4 5 6

9 7 8

0

CLEAR

13

PLAY

MODE

ENTER

2

3

4

DISPLAY

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

PAGE

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

5

6

7

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

8

1  (DVD)

Switches the power for a DVD player to On/Standby.

2 PAGE </>

Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when multiple pages are present.

3 DISPLAY

Press to display information.

4 TOP MENU

Press to display the top menu of a DVD-Video disc.

5 MENU

Displays a DVD disc menu – this varies with the disc and may be the same as the ‘top menu’.

6

///

(cursor buttons) and ENTER

Moves the cursor around the screen. Press ENTER to select the current menu option.

7 HOME MENU

Display/exit the on-screen display.

8 RETURN

Returns to the previously displayed menu screen.

LCD touch screen

9 ( AUDIO )

Press to select the audio channel or language.

( SUBTITLE )

Press to select a subtitle display.

( ANGLE )

Press to change the camera angle during DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback.

10 Playback controls

Press to start or resume playback.

Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by pressing  ).

Press to pause playback; press again to restart.

 / 

Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page.

 /   ,  /  

Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed.

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Press repeatedly to change the playback speed.

While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction.

11 ZOOM

Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image.

12 Number buttons

Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc.

ENTER

Press to select an option or execute a command.

CLEAR

Press to clear a numeric entry, etc.

13 PLAY MODE

Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example).

24

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 25 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Putting the batteries in the remote control

1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control.

2 Insert four AA/LR6 alkaline batteries into the battery compartment following the indications (  ,  ) inside the compartment.

Using the remote control

Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control:

• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit.

• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s remote sensor.

• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit.

• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote.

• Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown.

03

3 Close the cover.

Caution

Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:

• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.

• Don’t use different kinds of battery together — although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages.

• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment.

• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to be used for a month or more.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country /area.

WARNING

• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

30°

30°

7 m

25

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 26 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

04

Chapter 4

Before you start

Switching on

Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound

When the remote control’s SYSTEM ON button is pressed, the power of both the receiver subwoofer and Blu-ray disc player turns on.

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

FM / AM

The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to measure standing wave and reverb, optimizing the speaker settings and equalization

(MCACC Effect) for your particular room.

SYSTEM

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

The Blu-ray disc player and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver subwoofer is located on the display unit.

 STANDBY/ON

Receiver subwoofer

Important

• The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.

• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup.

Note

• You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout).

1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on back of the display unit.

SYSTEM

F.AUDIO

iPod

DISPLAY UNIT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

 STANDBY/ON

Display unit

Button hidden behind the front panel door.

2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position.

Blu-ray disc player

Setting up

26

En

After connecting and installing the Blu-ray disc player and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set the system up for use.

Blu-ray disc player

• Set the OSD language, video and audio output terminals, and the aspect ratio of your TV in the Setup Navigator (page 62).

Receiver subwoofer

• Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the surround sound (see below).

Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by using a table or chair.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 27 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press SYSTEM ON to turn the power on.

Basic operation

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

4 Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode.

SYSTEM

GUIDE

TV

VOL

VOL

INFO

MUTE

This manual is split into two parts, one covering using the receiver subwoofer, the other using the Blu-ray disc player. Below are some common operations and where to find them explained in this manual.

Operating the remote control

Make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen, as shown below.

SURR

SYSTEM

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

5 Press MCACC.

LINE

SLEEP

TEST

TONE

SOUND

EXIT

The supplied remote control can control not only the receiver subwoofer and Blu-ray disc player, but also other Pioneer products such as Flat Screen TVs, HDD/DVD recorders, and DVD players.

To operate these components, orient the remote control toward the display unit.

Operating the receiver subwoofer

Press SYSTEM CONTROL to display the SYSTEM screen.

The SYSTEM screen is shown on the remote control’s LCD screen, and the remote is switched to SYSTEM mode.

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

SOUND

RTRV

Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC . The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones.

• To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press

MCACC . The unit will continue to use the previous settings.

• If the ambient noise level is too high, Noisy!

blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels, press

MCACC , or to try again, press ENTER when Retry shows in the display.

• If you see an Error MIC!

or Error Speaker! message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER . (If this doesn’t work, press MCACC , turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the Error message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again.)

• When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, Complete shows in the display, and MCACC Effect is activated. (See Listening with MCACC Effect on page 33 to switch on/off MCACC Effect.)

• Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this unit upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.

DISPLAY

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

GUIDE

TV

VOL

TEST

TONE

PAGE

SYSTEM

VOL

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

INFO

MUTE

04

Note

• If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.

• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto

MCACC setup.

• If Complete doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.

27

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 28 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

04

Operating the Blu-ray disc player

Press BD (HDMI 1) to display the BD screen.

The BD screen is shown on the remote control’s LCD screen, and the remote is switched to Blu-ray disc player control mode.

ON

INPUT

SELECT

SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

OFF

TV

FM / AM

Using the LCD touch screen

Depending on the type of connected component you are operating

(such as a Blu-ray disc player), there may be multiple pages of information for the LCD touch screen. When the component you would like to control is not displayed, press PAGE to scroll to the page where the component you would like to control is located.

• The LCD touch screen’s illumination turns on and off each time the LIGHT button is pressed. The illumination automatically turns off after 30 seconds.

The LCD touch screen’s display turns off after one minute. To have the display shown once again, either touch the LCD or press a button on the remote control.

Watching a Blu-ray disc/DVD

Remember that when using the remote to control the supplied

Blu-ray disc player, you should point the remote towards the display unit, not the player itself.

1 Switches on the system.

OPEN/

CLOSE

Choosing and operating a source component

Press the input select buttons to cycle through connected components.

ON OFF SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

2 Set the remote control to BD mode.

Press BD (HDMI 1) to set the remote control to BD control mode in order to operate the Blu-ray disc player.

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

TV

FM / AM

INPUT

SELECT

 

The selected component changes, and the LCD screen on the remote control changes to that of the appropriate component.

• To select input for Digital 1 , Digital 2 , Analog , Front Audio In , or iPod , press the SYSTEM CONTROL button to set the remote control to the SYSTEM mode, then press the LINE button until the desired input function is shown on the display unit.

SOUND

RTRV

DIRECT

3 Switch on your TV.

Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the HDMI video input.

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SOUND

Note

• To temporarily control the receiver while listening to audio from a connected component on this unit, press SYSTEM CONTROL .

The selected input will not change, and the remote changes to

SYSTEM mode. To return to the previous operating mode, press

SYSTEM CONTROL once more.

ON

HDMI 1

BD

SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

OFF

TV

4 Press  OPEN/CLOSE on the Blu-ray disc player to open the disc tray.

5 Load a disc.

Load the disc with the printed side facing up.

Several dozen seconds are required to read the disc. Once reading is completed, the type of disc is displayed on the player’s front panel display.

28

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 29 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

6 Press  (play) (LCD page 1) to start playback.

To pause, press  (pause) during playback.

To stop, press  (stop) during playback.





See Playing discs or files on page 67 for more on playing discs.

7 Adjust the volume.

Listening to the radio

1 Switches on the system.

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

2 Set the remote control to FM/AM mode.

HDMI 1

BD

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

GUIDE

TV

VOL

Listening to a CD

INFO

MUTE

SYSTEM

CONTROL

1 2 3

3 Tune to a station (page 34) .

The LCD screen changes to that for the radio, and you can then operate the desired component.

0 CLEAR

1 Switches on the system.

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

2 Set the remote control to BD mode.

Press BD (HDMI 1) to set the remote control to BD control mode in order to operate the Blu-ray disc player.

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

TV

FM / AM

4 Adjust the volume.

GUIDE

TV

VOL

-

ST

+

INFO

MUTE

SYSTEM

CONTROL

04

3 Load a CD and start playback (page 67) .

4 Adjust the volume.

GUIDE

TV

VOL

INFO

MUTE

SYSTEM

CONTROL

29

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 30 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

05

Chapter 5

Listening to your system

Important

• Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen, as shown below).

SYSTEM

GUIDE

TV

VOL

VOL

INFO

MUTE

The Effective sound mode can be turned off (activating Direct mode) by doing the following:

Press DIRECT to switch to Direct Sound.

SOUND

RTRV

LINE

Press this button to switch between Effective Sound and Direct

Sound.

• When Direct Sound is selected, the DIRECT indicator lights.

SYSTEM

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

Auto listening mode

30

En

Effective Sound

(for optimum sound)

With the uniquely shaped high-quality speakers supplied with this unit, the Effective Sound mode enables the following Pioneer exclusive audio technologies designed to maximize the real experience of sound originally inherent in movies and music.

Turn on the Effective Sound mode under normal circumstances to maximize the capabilities of this unit.

• Dialogue Enhancement

Clarifies dialogue in movies to make it stand out from other background sounds.

• Dynamic Range Compression

Resuscitates detailed sound susceptible to ambient noise to create an acoustic environment where you feel as if you are right in the action.

• Original Channel Balance & Channel Mix

Since the orientation of the supplied speaker units is uniquely designed, channels are mixed down and balanced in a special manner. Also, the optimum balance is automatically achieved according to the contents being played back.

• Frequency Characteristic Correction

Realizes the playback characteristic optimized for long hours of listening in addition to the added features of the supplied speaker units.

• Stereo Playback in Surround

Outputs audio from the surround speakers while directing vocal sound to the front channels. You can play back stereo sources like CDs in seamless, comfortable surround sound.

This effect is available when you play back stereo sources in the

Auto listening mode (see below).

The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.

If you set up the system for Front surround (page 8), the Front Stage

Surround modes will give the best results (see page 32).

Press SURR to select the Auto listening mode.

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

Listening in surround sound

You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound.

Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the

Dolby Pro Logic or DTS Neo:6 decoding modes.

If you set up the system for Front surround (page 8), the Front Stage

Surround modes will give the best results (see page 32).

Press SURR repeatedly to select a listening mode.

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source that’s playing.

With two channel sources , you can select from:

• Auto – Auto listening mode (see above).

• 2 PL II Movie (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources.

• 2 PL II Music (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources; see Dolby Pro Logic II

Music settings below.

• 2 PL II Game (Dolby Pro Logic II Game) – 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to video games.

• 2 Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source.

• Neo:6 Cinema – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to movie sources.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 31 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

• Neo:6 Music – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to music sources; see Center image setting below.

• Stereo – See Listening in stereo on page 32.

With multichannel sources , you can select (according to format):

• Auto – Auto listening mode (see page 30).

• StandardDecode – Listening in Dolby Digital or DTS surround decoding. Plays back multichannel sources like Dolby Digital,

DTS, and multichannel PCM with the most standard decoder.

• Stereo – See Listening in stereo on page 32.

Note

• After the surround back signals of the 6.1/7.1-channel audio represented by DTS-ES are properly decoded, the original virtual surround back function outputs the surround back signals in combination with surround signals.

• You cannot select a mode other than Auto and Stereo while playing back DTS-HD, DTS-Express, or Dolby TrueHD (176.4 kHz/

192 kHz). Also, you cannot select DTS Neo:6 for Dolby Digital

Plus or Dolby TrueHD (below 96 kHz).

Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings

When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and

Panorama.

1 Press SOUND when Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode is active.

LINE

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SLEEP EXIT

Center image setting

When listening to two channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode (see page 30), you can also adjust the center image effect.

Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with vocals.

1 Press SOUND when Neo:6 Music mode is active.

LINE

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SLEEP EXIT

2 Select ‘Center Image’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

• Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).

As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Image 3 setting.

Using Advanced Surround

The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects.

These modes are designed to provide optimum listening effect when using the Standard surround setup described on page 8.

Press ADV SURR to select an Advanced Surround mode.

05

2 Select ‘Center Width’, ‘Dimension’ or ‘Panorama’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

• Center Width – Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower

(lower settings).

As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Width 3 setting.

• Dimension – Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).

• Panorama – Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

3 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

The ADV.SURR.

indicator lights when one of these modes is chosen. You cannot switch between modes for some audio streams.

Press repeatedly to select:

• Action – Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks

• Drama – Designed for movies with lots of dialog

• Sci-Fi – Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects

• Mono Film – Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks

• Ent.Show

– Suitable for musical sources

• Expanded – Creates an extra wide stereo field

• TV Surround – Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources

• Advanced Game – Suitable for video games

• Sports – Suitable for sports programs

• Classical – Gives a large concert hall-type sound

• Rock/Pop – Creates a live concert sound for rock and/or pop music

• Unplugged – Suitable for acoustic music sources

• Ext.Stereo

– Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source, using all of your speakers

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

31

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 32 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

05

Note

• You cannot use this function for the following audio streams:

– Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz

– DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0

– DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0

Using Front Stage Surround

Advance

Genre Sync Mode

Only when you have this unit connected to a Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder and are using the HDMI Control function, you can make use of the Genre Sync Mode to have the listening mode automatically change to that which best matches the genre of the contents playing from the recorder.

• Set the HDMI Mode to AMP Mode (page 43).

Press GENRE when listening to media contents from a recorder.

The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as described on page 8.

Press F.S.SURR to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode.

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

SOUND

RTRV

DIRECT

LINE

The most appropriate listening mode is selected and shown in the display. When the related genre could not be determined, No Genre or Can’t use may be displayed and the listening mode remains unchanged.

The F.S.SURR

indicator lights.

Press repeatedly to select Focus 5.1ch

, Wide 5.1ch

or Extra Power .

You cannot select a mode other than Extra Power for some audio streams.

• Focus 5.1ch

– Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center area where the left and right speakers sound projection converges.

• Wide 5.1ch

– Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than Focus 5.1ch

mode.

• Extra Power – Outputs stereo sound (in the case of multichannel sources, down-mixed stereo sound) from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect.

Note

• This function is available only for a Pioneer HDMI Controlcompatible HDD/DVD recorder.

• Mainly used with Jukebox and MP3 sources.

• To use this function, you must have an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder connected via HDMI, and have the HDMI Control function set to On.

Using the Sound Retriever

Note

• You cannot use this function for the following audio streams:

– Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz

– DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0

– DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0

When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image.

The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed two channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.

Press SOUND RTRV while listening to a stereo source.

Listening in stereo

You can listen to any source — stereo or multichannel — in stereo.

When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer.

Press SURR repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display.

SOUND

RTRV

DIRECT

LINE

Press repeatedly to switch between:

• Retriever On — Switches the Sound Retriever on.

• Retriever Off — Switches the Sound Retriever off.

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

Note

• This setting cannot be used with multichannel sources. Also, in case of SACD, DTS-HD, DTS-Express, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby

Digital Plus, and PCM (192 kHz/176.4 kHz), even stereo sources cannot be used.

• This feature is effective when used together with the Jukebox function of an HDD/DVD recorder.

32

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 33 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Listening with MCACC Effect Adjusting the bass and treble

05

Listen to sound using the corrected acoustic field settings obtained by MCACC.

1 Press SOUND to open the sound menu.

Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone.

1 Press SOUND to open the sound menu.

LINE

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SLEEP EXIT

Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes

LINE

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SLEEP EXIT

2 Select ‘MCACC Effect’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘MCACC On’ or ‘MCACC Off’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

• When MCACC Effect is off, equalization, channel delay, channel level and standing wave are set to off.

• When MCACC Effect is off, the channel delay and channel level can be adjusted manually and the settings stored separately from when MCACC Effect is on.

• MCACC Effect is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used.

2 Select ‘Tone’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Bass/Treble’

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

• Selecting Bass/Treble cancels the Midnight, Loudness and Quiet listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time.

4 Use

/ to select ‘Bass’ or ‘Treble’; use

/

to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

• Bass and Treble can be adjusted from -6dB to +6dB .

• When the Bass or Treble is set to something other than 0dB , the

TONE indicator lights.

The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.

The Loudness listening feature can be used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low volume levels.

The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source.

1 Press SOUND to open the sound menu.

Note

• While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD

(over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass/Treble is selected.

Adjusting sound delay

LINE

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SLEEP EXIT

2 Select ‘Tone’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Midnight’, ‘Loudness’ or ‘Quiet’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

• To cancel the Midnight, Loudness or Quiet listening modes, select Bass/Treble .

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

There are a total of 60 steps (levels) that you can adjust, with a total range of 200 msec.

1 Press SOUND to open the sound menu.

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SLEEP

LINE

EXIT

Note

• While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD

(over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass/Treble is selected.

• While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD

(over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select a mode other than Bass/Treble .

2 Select ‘Sound Delay’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select the length of the delay in sound.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

• This option is deactivated and not displayed if you have

AutoDelay set to On in HDMI Setup (see Setting the Auto Delay on page 44).

33

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 34 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

06

Chapter 6

Listening to the radio

Important

• To listen to the radio, press the FM/AM button to set the remote control to FM/AM control mode. The LCD screen on the remote control changes to the FM/AM screen.

HDMI 1

BD

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

Improving poor FM reception

If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono.

1 Press SETUP after tuning to an FM radio station.

HOME

MENU RETURN

FM/AM

1 2 3

Listening to the radio

2 Select ‘Tuner Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have to manually tune in every time you want to listen.

1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band.

HDMI 1

BD

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

The display shows the band and frequency.

2 Tune to a frequency.

0

CLEAR

-

ST

+

There are three tuning modes — manual, auto, and high-speed:

• Manual tuning – Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to change the displayed frequency.

• Auto tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching.

• High-speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method.

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Select ‘FM Auto/Mono’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select ‘FM Mono’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode.

Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast).

Improving poor AM sound

The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna.

34

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 35 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Changing the noise cut mode

Using RDS

If you find that the AM sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best.

1 Press SETUP after tuning to an AM radio station.

HOME

MENU

2 Select ‘Tuner Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Noise Cut’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3).

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

Memorizing stations

RETURN

Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information — the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for example.

One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that’s broadcasting a show with the program type, Jazz .

You can search the following program types:

News – News

Affairs – Current Affairs

Info – General Information

Sport – Sport

Educate – Educational

Drama – Radio plays, etc.

Culture – National or regional culture, theater, etc.

Science – Science and technology

Varied – Usually talk-based material, such as quiz shows or interviews

Pop M – Pop music

Rock M – Rock music

Easy M – Easy listening

Light M – ‘Light’ classical music

Classics – ‘Serious’ classical music

Other M – Music not fitting above categories

Weather – Weather reports and forecasts, meteorological information

Finance – Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc.

Children – Programs for children

Social – Social affairs

Religion – Programs concerning religion

Phone In – Public expressing their views by phone

Travel – Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announcements

Leisure – Leisure interests and hobbies

Jazz – Jazz

Country – Country music

Nation M – Popular music in a language other than English

Oldies – Popular music from the ’50s and ’60s

Folk M – Folk music

Document – Documentary

You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time.

1 Tune to an FM or AM radio station.

Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise Cut mode

(AM) as necessary. These settings are saved along with the preset.

2 Press SETUP.

HOME

MENU RETURN

Note

• In addition, there are three other program types, Test , Alarm , and No Type . Alarm and Test are used for emergency announcements. You can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. No Type appears when a program type cannot be found.

Displaying RDS information

3 Select ‘Tuner Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select ‘ST.Memory’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

5 Select the station preset you want.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

1

2

Listening to station presets

Make sure the tuner function is selected.

Select a station preset.

-

ST

+

• Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a preset directly.

You can display the different types of RDS information available.

Press DISPLAY to display the RDS information.

LIGHT

PAGE

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

Each press changes the display as follows:

• Radio Text ( RT ) – Messages sent by the radio station. For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT.

• Program Service Name ( PS ) – The name of the radio station.

• Program Type ( PTY ) – This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast.

• Search – PTY search (see below)

• Current tuner frequency

06

35

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 36 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

06

Note

• If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.

• If you see No Radio Text Data in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).

• In the PTY display, No Data or No Type may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.

Searching for RDS programs

You can search for a program type listed above.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

HDMI 1

BD

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly until ‘Search’ appears in the display.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

PAGE

LIGHT

TOOLS

MENU

3 Select the program type you want to hear.

Use

/

to select.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

4 Press ENTER to start the search.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

The system searches the station presets for a match. If it finds one, searching stops for five sec.

5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press ENTER within the five seconds.

If you don’t press ENTER , searching resumes.

Note

• RDS is only possible in the FM band.

36

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 37 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Chapter 7

Surround sound settings

Important

• Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen, as shown below).

SYSTEM

GUIDE

TV

VOL

VOL

INFO

MUTE

SYSTEM

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

2 Select ‘Sound Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Select ‘ChannelLevel’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Use

/ to select a channel, or use

/

to adjust the level of that channel.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

Using the Sound Setup menu

From the Sound Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system.

During setup, the speakers are represented by the following letters:

• L – Front left speaker

• C – Center speaker

• R – Front right speaker

• SR – Surround right speaker

• SL – Surround left speaker

• SW – Subwoofer

Channel level setting

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

• You can adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB.

5 Press ENTER once when you’re finished.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here.

The Auto MCACC feature (see page 26) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room.

This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel.

A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 39 for more on this.

1 Press SETUP.

Note

• When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on, the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten.

When MCACC Effect is off, the value set here is applied, regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature.

(The Auto MCACC setting is not overwritten.)

• The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51.

Speaker distance setting

HOME

MENU RETURN

The Auto MCACC feature (see page 26) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room.

Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Select ‘Sound Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Distance’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

37

En

07

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 38 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

07

4 Use

/ to select a speaker, or use

/

to adjust the distance.

Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.1 m to 9.0 m .

5 Press ENTER when you’re finished.

• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here.

Note

• When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on, the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten.

When MCACC Effect is off, the value set here is applied, regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature.

(The Auto MCACC setting is not overwritten.)

• The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51.

Dynamic Range Control

Dual mono setting

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Select ‘Sound Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Dual Mono’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select a setting.

Use

/

to select.

• CH1 Mono – Only channel 1 is played

• CH2 Mono – Only channel 2 is played

• CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the front speakers

5 Press ENTER to exit.

When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds — including some of the dialog — can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks.

Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Select ‘Sound Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘D.R.C.’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select a setting.

Use

/

to select.

Select one of the following:

• D.R.C. Auto – Only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select

D.R.C. High or D.R.C. Mid for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.

• D.R.C. High – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased)

• D.R.C. Mid – Mid setting

5

• D.R.C. Off – No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume)

Press ENTER to exit.

Note

• This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the Blu-ray disc player — see

Adjusting the Audio DRC on page 80.

Note

• This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the Blu-ray disc player — see

Switching the audio streams/channels on page 70.

Using the Virtual Surround Back mode

This mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information, or if the material sounds better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Select ‘Sound Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Virtual SB’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select a setting.

Use

/

to select.

Select one of the following:

• Vir.SB On – Virtual Surround Back is always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded material)

• Vir.SB Auto – Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to

6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES),

DTS Neo:6 or Advanced Surround mode

• Vir.SB Off – Virtual Surround Back mode is switched off

5 Press ENTER to exit.

Note

• Depending on the input signal and the listening mode, the

Virtual Surround Back mode may not be effective.

38

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 39 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

LFE Attenuate

Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones.

Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.

The LFE is not limited when set to 0dB , which is the recommended value. When set to -5dB , -10dB , -15dB or -20dB , the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When Off is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Select ‘Sound Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘LFE ATT’

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to adjust, then press ENTER to confirm.

Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone

If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 37). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays.

You can also adjust the channel levels for surround sound using test tone.

1 Carry out tone testing.

Press TEST TONE .

LINE

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SOUND

SLEEP EXIT

The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.

Adjust the volume level below 50.

2 Adjust the channel level of a tune while it is playing.

Use

/

to adjust.

The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ±10 dB.

• You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the

VOL +/– buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings).

• Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 37.

3 Press ENTER to exit test tone setup once you have finished.

• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

07

39

En

LX01BD_1.book Page 40 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

08

Chapter 8

Other connections

Important

• When making or changing connections on the side panel of this unit, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.

After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket.

• Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen, as shown below).

SYSTEM

GUIDE

TV

VOL

VOL

INFO

MUTE

Connect the audio output jacks on your TV to the audio input jacks on the receiver subwoofer.

• You can connect by either a digital or analog audio cable. Select only one method to make connections.

• To use the HDMI Control function when you are connected to a supported Pioneer Flat Screen TV, you must connect via HDMI.

• When digital connections are used, it may be necessary to adjust the digital audio output settings on the TV. For details, consult the operating instructions for your TV.

Audio input settings from TVs

(TV Input)

SYSTEM

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

To listen to audio from a Flat Screen TV on this device, you will need to connect an audio cable other than an HDMI cable. From this menu, set the audio input to that which you would like to connect.

Press TV on the remote control to switch this unit to the input source selected here. This setting is changed to the selected input and the audio from the Flat Screen TV is output from this device.

Select from inputs Digital 1 , Digital 2 and Analog .

1 Press SETUP.

Using this unit for TV audio

HOME

MENU RETURN

To listen to audio from a TV, connect the TV’s audio cable to one of the inputs on this unit.

Receiver subwoofer

2 Select ‘System Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

Side panel

IN 1 IN 2

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

ANTENNA

AM LOOP

L

R

ANALOG

AUDIO IN

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Select ‘TV Input’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to adjust, then press ENTER to confirm.

From digital audio output (optical)

From analog audio output

TV

40

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 41 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Connecting auxiliary components

Connecting an analog audio component

You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers,

CD recorders, etc.

We recommend using an HDMI cable to connect sources that have

HDMI terminals. For more information see Connecting using HDMI on page 43.

Connecting for digital audio

You can use the ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player.

Receiver subwoofer

L

R

ANALOG

AUDIO IN

Side panel

This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to connect external components, such as your MD or CD recorder.

Receiver subwoofer

08

Side panel

IN 1 IN 2

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

From digital audio output (optical)

MD, CD Recorder, etc.

Connect the OPTICAL IN 2 jack on the side panel to the optical output of an external playback component.

These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system.

You can also use the OPTICAL IN 1 jack to connect external components when not using it for sound input from a TV.

From analog audio output

Tape player, MD, DAT, etc.

You can use the F.AUDIO

input jack on the display unit to easily playback audio from a digital audio player or PC. Use a stereo miniplug cable to connect a source to the display unit.

• When you connect a cable to the F.AUDIO

jack, this unit’s input automatically switches to Front Audio In .

SYSTEM

F.AUDIO

iPod

DISPLAY UNIT

MCACC

SETUP MIC

Display unit

F.AUDIO

From analog audio output

Digital audio player, etc.

41

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 42 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

08

Connecting an iPod

Connecting external antennas

You can use the iPod jack on the display unit to playback music from an iPod. All operations can be carried out via the iPod. Use the supplied iPod cable to connect an iPod to this unit.

• When you connect an iPod, this unit’s input automatically switches to iPod .

• Certain iPod models have connectors that are not compatible with this unit.

For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl-insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected.

For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna.

External FM antenna

Receiver subwoofer

SYSTEM

F.AUDIO

iPod

DISPLAY UNIT

Display unit

Side panel iPod

ANTENNA

AM LOOP

FM

UNBAL 75 Ω iPod

AM loop antenna

External AM antenna

MENU

PAL connector

Outdoor antenna

Indoor antenna

(vinyl-coated wire) iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Listening to an external audio source

5 m to 6 m

About control out connections

To listen to audio from a connected external component on this unit, choose its input function on the remote control. Some Pioneer products can be controlled via this remote.

1 If the system isn’t already on, press SYSTEM ON to switch on.

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on.

2 Press LINE to select an audio input source.

SOUND

RTRV

DIRECT

Many Pioneer components support CONTROL connections, by which you can use the remote controls of any connected components by aiming them at the sensor of just one component.

When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component.

If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that you also have at least one set of HDMI or analog audio jacks connected to another component for grounding purposes.

Using a cable with mono mini-plugs on either side (sold separately), connect the CONTROL IN jack on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT jack on the receiver subwoofer.

This will allow you to control the other component by pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this receiver subwoofer.

42

En

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SOUND

Input sources are cycled through as shown below:

Digital 1 Digital 2 Analog

Front Audio In iPod

The display changes to that of the selected input source.

3 If necessary, start playback of the external source.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 43 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component, you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with, including DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Blu-ray

Disc, Video CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3, etc.

If you have a Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder equipped with an HDMI output terminal, connect it to the receiver subwoofer’s HDMI IN 2 terminal. The receiver subwoofer’s input can be switched and the recorder operated easily using the included remote control. (In the same way, connect a Pioneer DVD player to the HDMI IN 3 terminal.)

Receiver subwoofer

T IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

OUT IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

• Set the HDMI Mode in HDMI mode setting below to Through

Mode if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or

Flat Screen TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or Flat Screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display.

Note

• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth

Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVI

HDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

• This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-

Definition Multimedia Interface).

• This unit supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and

DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this unit also supports the corresponding format.

HDMI mode setting

SYSTEM

Rear panel

From HDMI output

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver subwoofer (amp) or through to a TV or Flat Screen TV. You cannot use a number of sound functions of this unit when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode .

HDMI/DVI-equipped component

1 Use the supplied HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN 2 to 3 interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI output on your HDMI component.

Once this receiver subwoofer is properly connected to your HDMI component, the HDMI indicator (red) lights up on the display unit when you watch HDMI contents.

2 Use the supplied HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI interconnect on a HDMI-compatible display.

• The arrow on the cable connector body should be face down for correct alignment with the connector on the unit.

Important

• Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen).

1 Press SETUP.

HOME

MENU RETURN

2 Select ‘HDMI Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

08

3 Use the HDMI 2 to 3 button to select the HDMI input you’ve connected to.

The remote control switches to the DVR control mode when HDMI 2 is pressed, the DVD control mode when HDMI 3 is pressed. If you do not want to operate these components, press the SYSTEM

CONTROL button to set the remote control to the receiver control mode.

ON SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

SELECT

 

TV

FM / AM

You can also use the display unit INPUT SELECTOR to carry out this operation.

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Select ‘HDMI Mode’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to adjust, then press ENTER to confirm.

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

• AMP Mode – Output an HDMI audio signal from this unit.

• Through Mode – Output an HDMI audio signal from a TV or Flat

Screen TV. The HDMI THROUGH indicator lights.

43

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 44 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

08

Setting the Auto Delay

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is automatically adjusted according to the video delay time.

1 Press SETUP.

HOME

MENU RETURN

2 Select ‘HDMI Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select ‘Auto Delay’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select ‘A.Delay On’ or ‘A.Delay Off’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

Tip

• This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability

(‘lip-sync’) for HDMI or HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.Delay

to Off and adjust the sound delay settings manually (page 33).

About HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players,

DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.

HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or highdefinition video plus standard to multichannel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as

DTVs.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.

44

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 45 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Chapter 9

HDMI Control

Important

• The KURO LINK function name used on the web and in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the operating instructions and on the product.

• Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen, as shown below).

SYSTEM

GUIDE

TV

VOL

VOL

INFO

MUTE

Making the HDMI Control connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected Flat Screen TV and up to three other components (including a maximum of two players or recorders).

Be sure to connect the Flat Screen TV’s audio cable to the audio input of this unit.

• HDMI Control may not operate properly if you do not use a High

Speed HDMI cable.

• Requires connection of audio cables and additional settings. For details see Audio input settings from TVs (TV Input) on page 40.

SYSTEM

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

L

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER

R

AUDIO OUT ( 7.1 ch ) SUB WOOFER

HDMI OUT

Y

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

P B

P

R

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

AC IN

By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer Flat

Screen TV or the Blu-ray disc player with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected Flat Screen

TV, as well as have the connected Flat Screen TV automatically change inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit.

Refer to the operating instructions for your Flat Screen TV for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.

• You cannot use this function with components that do not support HDMI Control.

• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Controlcompatible components other than those made by Pioneer.

CONTROL

IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

Rear panel

OUT IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

Blu-ray disc player

Receiver subwoofer

Side panel

OUT 1 OUT 2

CONTROL

IN 1 IN 2

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

SYSTEM

09

To HDMI input

From digital audio output (optical)

HDMI Control-compatible

Pioneer Flat Screen TV

45

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 46 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

09

• Connect the Flat Screen TV directly to this unit. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

Setting the HDMI options

HDMI Control-compatible

Pioneer Flat Screen TV

HDMI input

HDMI output

HDMI cable

You must adjust the settings of this unit as well as HDMI Controlcompatible connected components in order to make use of the

HDMI Control function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.

Setting the HDMI Control mode

HDMI input

HDMI OUT

HDMI cable

Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function On or Off .

You will need to set it to Control On to use the HDMI Control function.

• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put this setting to Control Off .

1 Press SETUP.

HOME

MENU RETURN

46

En

Receiver subwoofer

• Only connect components you intend to use as a source to the

HDMI input of this unit. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

2 Select ‘HDMI Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HDMI Control-compatible

Pioneer Flat Screen TV

HDMI input

HDMI OUT

HDMI cable

Receiver subwoofer

HDMI IN

HDMI output

HDMI cable

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Select ‘HDMI Ctrl’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to adjust, then press ENTER to confirm.

• Control On – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function, the audio and video output from the HDMI connection are output from the Flat

Screen TV.

• Control Off – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.

Before using synchronization

Important

• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.

After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

• After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization. The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking.

• To get the most out of this function, we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a Flat Screen TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this unit.

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power ON for all components, with the power for the Flat Screen TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this unit, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 47 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Synchronized amp mode

Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the Flat Screen TV. For more information, see the operating instructions of your Flat Screen TV.

Synchronized amp mode operations

By connecting a component to this unit with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows you to synchronize the following operations:

• Displays on the Flat Screen TV when you mute or adjust the volume of this unit.

• The input of this unit is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component.

• Even if you change this unit’s input to a device that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode remains in effect.

Canceling synchronized amp mode

If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a Flat Screen TV or while you are watching a TV program, the power for this unit is turned off.

09

47

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 48 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

10

Chapter 10

Additional information

Important

• Press SYSTEM CONTROL to set the remote control to receiver control mode in order to operate the receiver subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the SYSTEM screen, as shown below).

SYSTEM

GUIDE

TV

VOL

VOL

INFO

MUTE

Setting the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it.

Press SLEEP to select an option.

MCACC

TEST

TONE

SOUND

EXIT

SYSTEM

SURR

ADV.

SURR

F.S.

SURR

Dimming the display

You can choose to dim the display of the display unit if you find it too bright.

1 Press SETUP.

HOME

MENU RETURN

Choose between the following options:

• Sleep On – Switches off after about an hour

• Sleep Off – Cancels the sleep timer

After selecting Sleep On , you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes

(remaining):

S l e e p - - - - -

Note

• The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set.

The Blu-ray disc player does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.

2 Select ‘System Setup’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Select ‘Dimmer’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

4 Select ‘Dimmer Light’ or ‘Dimmer Dark’.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER to confirm.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Note

• The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.

48

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 49 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Setting up the remote to control your TV

TV Preset code list

You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page.

1 Set the input to TV.

ON

HDMI 1

BD

SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

OFF

FM / AM

2 Press and hold the TV button and press SETUP.

ON

HDMI 1

BD

SYSTEM

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

INPUT

SELECT

 

OFF

FM / AM

HOME

MENU RETURN

Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using.

Manufacturer Code(s)

AIWA 006

AKAI 009, 010

ALBA 011

BESTER 015

BLAUPUNKT 016, 017

BLUE SKY 018

BRANDT 019

BUSH 022

CLATRONIC 023

DAEWOO 035, 036, 037

DUAL 039, 040

FERGUSON 048, 049, 050

FIRSTLINE 051

FISHER 053

FRABA 054

FUNAI 056, 058, 059

GOLDSTAR 070

GOODMANS 071, 072, 073

GRUNDIG 074, 075, 076

ICE 084

IRRADIO 085

ITT 086, 087

JVC 093, 094, 095, 096

KENDO 098

LOEWE 103, 104, 105

MARK 116

MATSUI 117, 118

MEDION 119

MITSUBISHI 123, 124, 125

MIVER 127

Manufacturer Code(s)

NEC 130

NOKIA 086, 087, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136

NORDMENDE 137, 138, 139

OCEANIC 135, 136

OKANO 140

ONWA 141

PANASONIC 146, 147

PHILIPS 155

PHONOLA 157

RADIO 163

RADIOLA 168

SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180

SAMSUNG 185, 186

SANYO 190, 191, 192, 193, 194

SCHNEIDER 199, 200, 201, 202

SHARP 208, 209

SIEMENS 212

SONY 215

TATUNG 221

TELEFUNKEN 222, 223, 224, 225

THOMSON 226, 227

THORN 228

TOSHIBA 231, 232

UNIVERSUM 235

W.HOUSE

239

WATSON 244

YAMAHA 245, 246, 247, 248, 249

PIONEER 001, 002

The TV preset screen is shown on the remote control, and the current maker code is displayed on the LCD screen.

TV PRESET

3 5 1 Maker code

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CLEAR

0

ENTER

Number buttons

ENTER

EXIT

3 Use the number buttons to input the maker code for your

TV, and press ENTER.

See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list.

• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV.

4 Point the remote towards your TV and press TV  to check that the remote works with your TV.

10

ON SYSTEM

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

OFF

TV and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 2 with a new code.

49

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 50 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

10

Resetting the system Surround sound formats

Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default.

1 Press  STANDBY/ON to switch the system on.

2 Press and hold INPUT SELECTOR then press  STANDBY/ON on the display unit.

The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset.

Installation and maintenance

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Hints on installation

50

En

We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location:

Do...

Use in a well-ventilated room.

Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack.

Don’t...

Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances.

Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight.

Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.

Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use.

Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference

— especially if the television uses an indoor antenna.

Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam.

Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may prevent proper cooling of the system unit.

Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unit’s feet.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks.

It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby

Digital.

In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono, stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels. Another feature, called

Dialog Normalization, attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve uniform playback level.

Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II (and

Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts surround sound from sources as follows:

• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround) from any stereo source

• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo surround) from any stereo source

With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver.

Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack, which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology for all highdefinition programming and media. It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on

Dolby Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the nextgeneration A/V receivers but remains fully compatible with all current A/

V receivers.

Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 51 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Mbps on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers.

It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems.

Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the upcoming era. Dolby

TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high-definition picture.

It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and video.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS

5.1 channel decoder.

DTS-EXPRESS

DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5

Mbps in the Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD Master

Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies.

“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD Master

Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

* HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas Dolby Digital Plus and

Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.

10

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system from DTS

Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES

Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/ right channels. Both sources are also compatible with a conventional

DTS 5.1 channel decoder.

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information already encoded into the source, as well as its own processing to determine channel localization (with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel sources.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

51

En

LX01BD_1.book Page 52 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

10

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.

• If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

• If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the Blu-ray disc player, try setting the player’s audio-related settings back to their defaults — see Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu on page 62.

General

Problem Remedy

The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup). Or, the display disappears suddenly and no sound is output

(with the POWER ON indicator

(Blue) and the HDMI indicator

(Red) lit up).

• Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.

• Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically.

• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.

• Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer.

• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.

• Try reducing the volume level.

• If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.

• Do not block the air intake opening on the bottom as well as the air exhaust opening on the back of this unit.

No sound is output when an input function is selected.

• When playing back a source on the supplied Blu-ray disc player, make sure that the settings for Audio Out

(page 82), and the HDMI under HDMI Audio Out (page 83) are all at their default values.

• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly and the volume level of your external component (i.e. a portable player, etc.) is adjusted (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 41).

• Turn up the volume.

• No audio is output from the speakers connected to this unit if HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode

(page 43).

• No audio is output if a DVI component is connected via HDMI.

• Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off.

No sound from surround speaker.

• Refer to Channel level setting on page 37 to check the speaker levels.

• Check that you haven’t selected the Stereo mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30).

• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 10).

• Verify the audio output and HDMI settings of your external component when connecting an external component via an optical digital cable or HDMI cable.

Can’t operate using the remote control.

• Replace the batteries ( Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 25).

• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor ( Using the remote control on page 25).

• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.

• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.

• For operating the Blu-ray disc player, make sure that the control cable and HDMI cable are connected (page 14).

• For operating the other Pioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this receiver subwoofer, make sure that the control cable and either an HDMI or analog audio cable are connected

(page 42).

52

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 53 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Tuner

Problem

Considerable noise in radio broadcasts.

Remedy

• Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 10) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 42).

• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 42).

• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.

Auto tuning does not pick up some stations.

• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.

HDMI

10

Message

192kHz PCM

SACD

DTS-HD

DTS Express

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby D+

No MIC

Muting

2ch Only

Exit

HDMI Through

Unknown

No Genre

HDMI C.ERR 2C*

Can’t use

Symptom

No picture or sound.

No sound, or sound suddenly ceases.

HDMI Control does not function.

Remedy

• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCPcompatible.

• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible).

• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

• Check that the HDMI Mode setting is set to AMP Mode / Through Mode .

• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.

• Check the audio output settings of the source component.

• Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected.

• Make sure that this unit’s HDMI Control mode is set to Control On (page 46).

• Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not. For more information refer to the operating instructions of your Flat Screen TV, HDD/DVD recorder, DVD player, etc.

• This unit does not guarantee HDMI Control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer.

Displayed Messages

Description

These messages are displayed when you operate a function incompatible with the audio source being played back.

Displays when you press MCACC when the MCACC setup mic is not connected.

Displays when you press TEST TONE or MCACC while this unit is muted.

An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source.

Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.

Displays when you change the Listening Mode, the volume level, or some sound settings when the HDMI

Mode is set to Through Mode.

The genre information for contents being played back on a Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder cannot be obtained.

There is no genre set for contents being played back on a Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder.

The connected component is not compatible with synchronized genre mode.

• You tried to use Genre Sync Mode for a source component that does not support this function.

• The source component is in a situation where Genre Sync Mode cannot be used.

• You tried to use Genre Sync Mode when the input source of this unit is a source other than HDMI.

• The operation is forbidden due to the surround settings.

• When the volume level is over 51, some functions are restricted.

53

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 54 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

10 Message

HDMI C.ERR 1**

Noisy!

Error MIC!

Error Speaker!

Over Temp

OC Error1

OC Error2

*** BackUpERR

Description

Check if the HDMI cable is properly connected. If the cable is properly connected, this unit may be damaged.

In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or your nearest dealer.

Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.

An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly.

An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly.

Try lowering the volume. If this problem is not fixed by removing and inserting the power cable, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or your nearest dealer.

Check whether the speaker cables are short-circuited. If the error message continues to be displayed, contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.

Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.

Specifications

Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer

Model

Rated voltage

Other connector

Output

System connector

Audio input

SX-LX70SW

AC 220 V to 240 V

50 Hz/60 Hz Rated frequency

Power consumption

Power consumption (standby)

Weight

External dimensions (including projecting parts)

69 W

0.39 W (HDMI Control ON)

0.29 W (HDMI Control OFF)

17.8 kg

245 mm (W) x 409 mm (H) x 600 mm (D)

Tolerable operating temperature

System

Speaker

+5 °C to +35 °C

Tolerable operating humidity

Amplifier section:

RMS Power Output

(8 channel output)

5 % to 85 % (no condensation)

Front, Center, Surround (6 channel) 50 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8

)

Dual Subwoofer (2 channel) 100 W (50 W+ 50 W) (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 8

)

FM tuner section

AM tuner section

Subwoofer section

Frequency range

Antenna

Frequency range

Antenna

Enclosure

87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

75

, unbalanced

531 kHz to 1602 kHz

Loop antenna

Bass-reflex floor type (magnetically shielded)

18 cm 1-way system

Nominal impedance

Frequency range

18 cm cone type x2

8

30 Hz to 500 Hz

HDMI terminal

Maximum Input Power

Input

50 W x2

19 pin x3

19 pin (5 V, 100 mA)

26 pin

Optical x2 (Digital)

RCA (2 pin) (Analog)

Display unit

Control output

System connector

Front Audio input

Mini jack x2

26 pin

MCACC input iPod input

Mini jack

Mini jack

20 pin (12 V, 420 mA)

54

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_1.book Page 55 Tuesday, September 2, 2008 12:33 PM

Satellite Speaker

(Front/center speakers x2, Surround speakers x2)

Model

Enclosure

System

Speakers

Nominal impedance Front channel

Center channel

Frequency range

Maximum input power

Front channel

Center channel

Dimensions

Weight

Enclosure

System

Speakers

Nominal impedance

Frequency range

Maximum input power

Dimensions

Weight

SSP-LX70ST

Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded)

5.2 cm 1-way system

5.2 cm cone type x3

8

8

200 Hz to 20 kHz

50 W

50 W

122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D)

0.5 kg

Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded)

5.2 cm 1-way system

5.2 cm cone type x2

8

200 Hz to 20 kHz

50 W

122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D)

0.44 kg

Accessories

Accessory box (AS-LX71):

Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AA/LR6 alkaline batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Display unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HDMI cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Optical digital cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 iPod cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Warranty card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Setup Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

These operating instructions

Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70SW) box:

Cleaning cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Satellite Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box:

Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Note

• Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements.

10

55

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 56 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Section Two

Blu-ray Disc Player

SBDP-LX08

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 57 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Contents

Section Two

01 Before you start

Types of discs/files that can be played. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

02 Getting Started

Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Using the TOOLS menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Erasing the additional data from BD-ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Switching the video output terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Switching the output video resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

03 Playback

Playing discs or files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Forward and reverse scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Skipping content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Step forward and step reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Switching the camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Switching the audio streams/channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Switching the secondary video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Displaying the disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Playing from a specific time (Time Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly

(A-B Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playing in random order (Random Play). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

About Play Mode types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Playing from the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Playing movie files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Playing music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

04 Adjusting audio and video

Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

05 Advanced settings

Changing the settings (Initial Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Operating the Initial Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Changing to other language at language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Changing the speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Adjusting the output level of the various speakers

(Channel Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Registering or Changing the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs . . . . . . . .87

Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs . . . . . . . . .87

Changing the Country/Area code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals

(Output Terminal Priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings . . . . . . .89

About the audio output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

06 Other player connections

Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Connecting using the HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Connecting to a TV with no HDMI input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Connecting the other audio component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

07 Additional information

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

When connected using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table . . . . . . . . . .100

Language Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Country/Area Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Moving the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Turn the power off when not using the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Cleaning the player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

57

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 58 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

01

Chapter 1

Before you start

Types of discs/files that can be played

Playable discs

Discs with the logo marks below indicated on the disc label, package or jacket can be played.

Application format

Disc type Logo

BDMV 1 BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR

BD

BD-ROM

BD-R

BD-RE

CD-DA

DTS-CD

DATA-DISC 2

     

DVD-ROM

DVD-R

DVD

DVD-R DL

(Dual Layer)

DVD-RW

DVD+R

DVD+RW

CD-DA

(Music CD)

CD

CD-R

CD-RW

CD-ROM

1. Including the AVCHD format.

2. Discs on which movie files or music files are recorded.

58

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 59 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Discs that cannot be played

• HD DVDs

• DVD Audio discs

• DVD-RAM discs

• Non-finalized DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW discs in the

DVD-Video format and AVCHD format

• Non-finalized Dual Layer DVD-R discs in the DVD VR format

• SACDs

• Video CDs

• SVCDs

“Blu-ray Disc” and are trademarks.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Advanced Digital Out are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Playing BDs

• BDs (BDMV) compatible with the formats below can be played.

– Blu-ray Disc Read-Only (ROM) Format Version 2

– Blu-ray Disc Recordable (R) Format Version 2

– Blu-ray Disc Rewritable (RE) Format Version 3

This player supports BD-ROM Profile 1 Version 1.1.

BONUSVIEW Functions such as playback of secondary video

(Picture-in-Picture) and secondary audio can be used. For details on secondary video and secondary audio playback, refer to the disc’s instructions.

Note

• Some discs cannot be played, even if one of the above logo marks is indicated.

• To play 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc depression in the center of the disc tray. No adapter is necessary. 8 cm BD-

ROMs cannot be played.

About audio formats

The following audio formats are supported on this player:

• Dolby TrueHD

• Dolby Digital Plus

• Dolby Digital

• DTS-HD Master Audio

• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

• DTS Digital Surround

• MPEG

• MPEG-2 AAC

• Linear PCM

To enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, it is recommended to connect the player to an AV receiver or amplifier compatible with these audio formats using an HDMI cable. After loading a BD containing sound in one of these audio formats, select the audio format on the menu screen.

See About the audio output settings on page 90 for the output conditions of the different formats.

“BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association.

When a BD-ROM is played, additional data may be stored in the player’s memory area (local storage). If the message indicating low memory (local storage) appears, erase the BDMV data

(page 65).

• BDs (BDAV) compatible with the formats below can be played.

– Blu-ray Disc Recordable (R) Format Version 1

– Blu-ray Disc Rewritable (RE) Format Version 2

• Dual Layer BDs can be played.

• Movie and music files recorded on BDs cannot be played.

• 8 cm BD-ROMs cannot be played.

Playing DVDs

• DVD-Video can be played.

• DVD-R/-RW/+R/+RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format can be played (finalize them before playing them on this player).

• DVD-R/-RW discs recorded in the VR format (Video Recording format) can be played.

• This label indicates playback compatibility with DVD-RW discs recorded in VR format (Video Recording format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can only be achieved using a CPRM compatible device.

01

• DVDs recorded in the AVCHD format can be played (finalize them before playing them on this player).

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Matsushita

Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sony Corporation.

• Movie and music files recorded on DVD-R/-RW/+R/+RW discs can be played. See Playable files on page 60.

59

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 60 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

01

• Dual Layer DVDs can be played. However, non-finalized Dual

Layer DVD-R discs recorded in the VR format cannot be played

(finalize them before playing them on this player).

• HD DVD, DVD Audio and DVD-RAM discs cannot be played.

About region numbers

Blu-ray Disc Player and BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs are assigned region numbers according to the region in which they are sold.

This player’s region numbers are:

• BD-ROM: B

• DVD-Video: 2

Discs not including these numbers cannot be played. Discs playable on this player are as shown below.

• BDs: B (including B) and ALL

• DVDs: 2 (including 2) and ALL

Playing CDs

• Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) can be played.

• Movie and music files recorded on CDs can be played. See

Playable files below.

• SACD, Video CD and Super VCD discs cannot be played.

• Regarding copy protected CDs: This player is designed to conform to the specifications of the Audio CD format. This player does not support the playback or function of discs that do not conform to these specifications.

DualDisc playback

A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content — video, audio, etc. — while the other side contains non-

DVD content such as digital audio material.

The DVD side of a DualDisc will be played on this player (excluding any DVD-Audio content).

The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compatible with this player.

It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable.

For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer.

Playing discs created on computers

• It may not be possible to play DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW discs recorded using a personal recorder or computer. (This can be due to various reasons, including disc properties, scratches, dirt on the disc, dirt on the player’s lens, condensation and so on.)

• It may not be possible to play discs recorded using a computer due to the application settings or environment. Record discs in the proper format. For details, contact the dealer.

Playable files

Movie and music files recorded on DVDs and CDs can be played.

Caution

• In DVD, only the one recorded by the ISO 9660 file system can be played.

• Some files may not be playable.

• For some files, it may not be possible to use certain functions during playback.

• It may not be possible to play some files, even if they have the extension of a file playable on this player.

• Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) cannot be played (not including DivX VOD files).

Supported movie file formats

• DivX

DivX is a media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain not only video but also advanced media features like subtitles and alternate audiotracks, etc.

Conform to the size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x 480 pixels.

DivX files encoded with GMC/Qpel option cannot be played.

Only audio signals with MP3 or Dolby Digital (AC3) format are output.

Note that files other than the ones containing DivX video cannot be played, even if they have the extension “.avi”.

Official DivX

®

Certified product.

Plays all versions of DivX

®

video (including DivX

®

6) with standard playback of DivX

®

media files.

DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX,

Inc. and are used under license.

Note

• DivX VOD files are protected by DRM. They can only be played on registered devices.

– You may be requested by the file distributor to input the DivX

VOD registration code for authorization of the player in order to play DivX VOD files. This player’s DivX VOD registration code can be checked at Initial Setup

Options

DivX

VOD

Registration Code (page 84).

– DivX VOD files for which the player’s DivX VOD registration code is not authorized cannot be played ( Authorization

Error is displayed).

– The number of views is restricted for some DivX VOD files.

When such files are played on this player, the remaining number of views is displayed. Files for which the remaining number of views has reached 0 cannot be played ( Rental

Expired is displayed). Files for which the number of views is not restricted can be played as many times as you like (the remaining number of views is not displayed).

60

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 61 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Supported music file formats

• Windows Media™ Audio 9 (WMA9)

Bit rate: Up to 192 kbps

Sampling frequencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz

Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from

Microsoft Licensing, Inc.

• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)

Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps

Sampling frequencies: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz

Playable file extensions

• Movie files

.divx and .avi

• Music files

.wma and .mp3

01

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

61

En

LX01BD_2.book Page 62 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

02

Chapter 2

Getting Started

Important

• Press BD (HDMI 1) to set the remote control to BD control mode in order to operate the Blu-ray disc player.

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

TV

FM / AM

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Please select the on-screen display language.

• The BD settings are listed on two separate pages. To cycle between pages, use the PAGE button.

Making settings using the

Setup Navigator menu

Be sure to perform these settings when using the player for the first time.

Caution

• Before turning on the power, check that the connections between the player and other devices are correct.

1 Turn on the power.

Press SYSTEM ON .

Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD-Video menu language will also be set.

When you have this player connected to a Pioneer Flat Screen TV that is compatible with HDMI Control, language settings are imported from the Pioneer Flat Screen TV’s language settings before

Setup Navigator begins.

4 Select and set the video and audio output terminals.

Select the actually connected video and audio output terminals.

This system uses the HDMI terminal.

Use

/

/

/

to select HDMI for both Video and Audio , then press ENTER .

Proceed to Step 5.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

2 Turn on the TV’s power and switch the input.

See the TV’s operating instructions for instructions on operating the

TV.

Check that the Setup Navigator menu is displayed.

If TV Control is set, the TV can be operated with the receiver subwoofer’s remote control (page 64).

If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed

Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu, select Initial

Setup

Setup Navigator

Start, then press ENTER.

3 Select the OSD language.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Select the output terminals to be used for the video and audio signals of this player.

Video HDMI

Audio HDMI

Use [ ][ ] to select video or audio, then press [ ][ ] to select the output terminal.

• When Component Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 6.

• When S-Video/Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 7.

Setting item

HDMI

Output terminal name

HDMI Output

Component Video Video Output

S-Video/Video

Component Video

S-Video

HDMI

Digital Audio

Analog Audio

Video

HDMI Output

Digital Audio

Output

Optical

Audio Output (2 ch)

Audio Output (7.1 ch)

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

62

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 63 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Caution

• When HDMI is selected for Video , no video signals are output from the COMPONENT VIDEO , S-VIDEO or VIDEO output terminals.

• When Component Video or S-Video/Video is selected for

Video , no video signals are output from the HDMI OUT terminal.

• The video and audio signals output from the set output terminals are output synchronously (lip synchronization).

• Linear PCM audio signals (2 channels) are output from all terminals other than the ones selected for Audio , regardless of the audio format or the player’s settings.

5 Select and set the HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting.

Use

/

to select On , then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

7 Select the aspect ratio of your TV.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Select the screen aspect ratio to match your TV.

8 Check the settings.

Select Proceed , then press ENTER .

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Select [Proceed] if you want to start testing your audio and video settings.

Proceed

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Select the HDMI Hi-speed transmission setting.

On Off

Normally select [On] (Recommended).

Select [Off] if the video or audio of HDMI-connected was not output in the test output.

• When HDMI High-Speed Transmission is set to Off , use the supplied HDMI cable or a High Speed HDMI™ cable. The picture and sound may not be output properly if any other HDMI cable

(standard HDMI™ cable) is used.

• When HDMI is selected for Video , proceed to step 8.

• When Component Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 6.

• When S-Video/Video is selected for Video , proceed to step 7.

6 Select the output video resolution from the COMPONENT

VIDEO output terminals.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Select the output video resolution at the

Component video terminal.

9 Output test tones.

Use

/

to select Yes , then press ENTER .

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

The test tone will be output.

Reduce the volume to an appropriate level.

Caution

Yes

• The screen in step 10 and test tones are output simultaneously according to the settings in steps 4 to 7. Lower the volume of the devices connected with the player.

No

The video and/or audio may not be output under certain setup.

The setup menu comes back in 30 seconds.

02

If you select [Source Direct], the output resolution is determined according to the video format of the playing source.

For details on the resolution settings, see Switching the output video resolution on page 65.

63

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 64 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

02

10 Finish the Setup Navigator menu.

Use

/

to select Finish , then press ENTER .

Setup Navigator

BD PLAYER

Setup is complete!

2 Select and set the item.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Finish Go Back

The setup menu comes back in 30 seconds.

To redo the settings from the start, select Go Back .

Depending on the output terminal setting of step 4 or the HDMI cable being used, it may happen that no picture and/or sound is output. If this happens, the setup returns to step 4 if there is no operation for over 30 seconds. Once the setup returns to step 4, redo the settings according to the connected devices and the HDMI cable being used.

About the screen saver

The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no operation for over 1 minute after playback is stopped or paused. The screen saver turns off when an operation is performed on the player or remote control.

The screen saver is automatically activated if there is no operation for over 1 minute after the Home Menu or Home Media Gallery is displayed while playing a BD or DVD.

With CDs and music files, the screen saver is automatically activated if no button is operated for over 1 minute, even while the

CD or music file is playing.

Using the TOOLS menu

Various functions can be called out according to the player’s operating status.

1 Display the TOOLS menu.

Press TOOLS .

DISPLAY LIGHT

PAGE

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

Note

• Items that cannot be changed are displayed in gray. The items that can be selected depend on the player’s status.

To close the TOOLS menu

Press TOOLS or RETURN .

TOOLS menu item list

Item Description

Output Video Resolution Switch the output video resolution from the various output terminals (page 65).

Play from Beginning

Play Mode

Angle

Play the selected title, track or file from the start.

Display the Play Mode screen (page 71).

Switch the BD-ROM/DVD-Video disc’s camera angles (page 69).

Switch the subtitles (page 69).

Subtitle

Audio

Secondary Audio

Secondary Video

Switch the audio streams/channels (page 70).

Switch the BD-ROM’s secondary audio streams/channels (page 70).

Switch the BD-ROM’s secondary video

(Picture-in-Picture) (page 70).

Original/Play List

Add to HMG Playlist Add the selected track or file to the HMG

Playlist (page 77).

Delete from HMG Playlist Delete the selected track or file from the HMG

Playlist (page 78).

Now Playing Display the playback screen of the currently playing track or file.

Video Adjust

Switch the DVD-R/-RW’s (VR format) list screen between the original list and the playlist.

Audio DRC

BDMV Data Erase

Display the picture quality adjustment screen

(page 79).

Adjust the Audio DRC (page 80).

Erase the additional data from BD-ROMs.

BD PLAYER

TOOLS

Video Adjust

Audio DRC

Add to HMG Playlist

Audio

Subtitle

64

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 65 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Erasing the additional data from BD-ROMs

Switching the video output terminal

When a BD-ROM is played, additional data may be stored in the player’s memory (local storage).

If the message indicating low memory (local storage) appears, erase the BDMV data.

Caution

• When the BDMV data is erased, all the data of secondary video

(Picture-in-Picture), secondary audio, bookmark, etc. that has been stored is erased.

1 Display the Tools menu.

With no disc loaded, press the TOOLS button.

DISPLAY LIGHT

PAGE

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

Use the procedure below to switch the video output terminal. Switch between the digital output (HDMI output) and the analog output

(Component Video output, S-Video output or Video output).

Switch the terminal from which the video signals are output.

Press VIDEO SEL (LCD page 2) .

1 2 3

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

FL

DIMMER

VIDEO

SEL

RESO-

LUTION

The video output terminal switches each time the button is pressed.

02

BD PLAYER

TOOLS Output Video Resolution

BDMV Data Erase

2 Select and set the item.

Use

/

to select BDMV Data Erase , then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

3 Erase the data.

Use

/

to select Yes , then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

Caution

• The picture may not be displayed for a while when the video output terminal is switched.

• When the HDMI OUT terminal is selected, no video signals are output from the other video output terminals.

• When a video output terminal other than the HDMI OUT terminal is selected, no video signals are output from the HDMI

OUT terminal. However, audio signals are output.

Switching the output video resolution

Use the procedure below to switch the output video resolution from the various video output terminals.

Press RESOLUTION / (LCD page 2) .

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Erases all of the data added from BDMV.

Please wait a while.

OK to erase data?

Yes No

Caution

• It takes time to erase the BDMV data for a while. Do not unplug the power cord for about 10 seconds after performing the above procedure.

1 2 3

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

FL

DIMMER

VIDEO

SEL

RESO-

LUTION

The current output video resolution is displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display.

When pressed again, the output video resolution switches.

Example: Video resolution of the currently playing disc

Output Video Resolution

Auto

Source : 1080/50i

Current Output : 1080/50i

Output video resolution from the player

The output video resolution can also be switched using

/

.

65

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 66 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

02

The output video resolution can be switched by selecting Output

Video Resolution from the TOOLS menu.

The output video resolution depends on the video output terminal.

See the table below.

The table below shows the output video resolution for the different terminals when the frame/field frequency of the playback source is

50 Hz on the upper line, the resolutions when the source's frame/ field frequency is 60 Hz on the lower line.

Output video resolution setting

HDMI OUT terminal

Auto

2

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO/

VIDEO output terminals

1 output terminal

1

— —

TV system

576i or

480i

576p or

480p

1080i

1080p

2

Resolution preferred by TV

3,4

576/50i

480/60i

576/50p

480/60p

1080/50i

1080/60i

576/50i

480/60i

576/50p

480/60p

576/50p

1080/60i

6

576/50i

480/60i

576/50i

480/60i

576/50i

480/60i

 5

PAL

 5

PAL

PAL

 5

PAL

 5

PAL

Source

Direct

1080/50p

7

1080/60p

7

Resolution recorded on disc

3,8,9

Resolution recorded on disc

8,9,10

576/50i

480/60i

 5

PAL

 5

1. Depending on the BD, the pictures may not be output.

2. Cannot be selected when the video signals are being output from the

COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals, S-VIDEO output terminal or the

VIDEO output terminal.

3. For details on the output of film material (1080/24p or 720/24p video signals), see To output film material below.

4. Sources with a resolution of 720/50p, 720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/

50i or 1080/60i, even if the TV’s preferred resolution is 1080/50p or 1080/60p.

5. Depends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting (page 82).

6. DVD-Video or DVD VR format is output at 480/60p. BDs format may be output at 480/60p.

7. Depending on the connected HDMI cable, the video signals may not be output. Also, sources with a resolution of 720/50p is output at 1080/50i, and

720/60p and 720/24p are output at 1080/60i.

8. Depending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be output.

9. 720/24p film material is output at 720/60p.

10. 1080/24p film material is output at 1080/60i.

switches to 60 Hz (or 24 Hz for HDMI, depending on the setting), and the TV system format for the video signal output from the S-VIDEO and VIDEO output terminals is set to NTSC on PAL TV . When playback is stopped, the frame/field frequency and TV system settings remain at the settings last used. The frame/field frequency and TV system settings do not change even when the power is turned off. They only switch when a video material with a different frame/field frequency is played.

If the picture is not displayed on the TV when a source with a different frame/field frequency is played, use the procedure below to switch the frame/field frequency and TV system settings for the signal output from the player.

Eject the disc, then press the  OPEN/CLOSE button on the front panel while pressing the  PLAY button to switch to a different frame/field frequency. The frame/field frequency switches between

50 Hz and 60 Hz each time this operation is performed. The indicator for the frame frequency’s current setting lights on the front panel display (page 17).

About Film material

The film material is a video signal with a frame rate of 24 frames/ second. For example, these materials include 1080/24p, 720/24p, etc.

Example: Video resolution of the currently playing disc

Output Video Resolution

Auto

Source : 1080/24p

Current Output : 1080/24p

Output video resolution from the player

To output film material

To output 1080/24p film material from the HDMI output terminal, set the output video resolution to either Auto or Source Direct .

Caution

• 1080/24p signals can only be output from the HDMI OUT terminal. They cannot be output from other video terminals.

• When Auto is selected, the picture is output at 60 frames/ second if your TV is not compatible with 1080/24p signals.

• When Source Direct is selected, the signals are output as such, even if your TV is not compatible with 1080/24p signals. If the picture is not displayed properly, use RESOLUTION / to set to the output video resolution at which the picture is properly displayed.

• 720/24p video signals are output at 60 frames/second, even if the resolution is set to Auto or Source Direct .

66

En

Caution

• On some TVs, the picture may not be displayed properly when the resolution is switched. If this happens, use RESOLUTION / to set to a resolution at which the picture is properly displayed.

• When video signals are being output with a resolution of 1080/

50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p, 1080/60i, 1080/60p or 720/60p from the HDMI output terminal or component video output terminals, the picture may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9, even if the TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard) .

• The picture may not be displayed for a while when the resolution is switched.

About the frame/field frequency and NTSC/

PAL TV systems

By factory default setting, the frame/field frequency is set for an output of 50 Hz, and the video signal output from the S-VIDEO and

VIDEO output terminals is set to be output in the PAL TV system format. When sources with a frame/field frequency of 60 Hz or

24 Hz are played, the output frame/field frequency automatically

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 67 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Chapter 3

Playback

Important

• Press BD (HDMI 1) to set the remote control to BD control mode in order to operate the Blu-ray disc player.

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

TV

FM / AM

3 Press  (play) to play the disc.

 

To pause, press  (pause) during playback.

To stop, press  (stop) during playback.

• The BD settings are listed on two separate pages. To cycle between pages, use the PAGE button.

Playing discs or files

This section describes the player’s main operations.

For the types of discs that can be played, see Playable discs on page 58. For the types of files that can be played, see Playable files on page 60. Movie and music files recorded on discs are played with

Home Media Gallery (page 75).

1 Press SYSTEM ON to turn on the power.

Turn the TV’s power on and switch its input beforehand.

OFF

HDMI 1

BD

INPUT

TV

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD TV

2 Press OPEN/CLOSE (LCD page 1) to open the disc tray and load the disc.

Note

• Some discs start playing automatically when the disc tray is closed.

• DVD-Video discs have parental lock features. Input the password registered in the player’s settings to unlock the parental lock. For details, see page 87.

• For some BD-R/-RE, playback protection is set for the disc or titles.

Input the code number set for the disc to unlock the protection.

If the disc menu is displayed

For some discs, the disc menu is displayed automatically when playback starts. The contents of the disc menu and the way to operate differ from disc to disc.

Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function)

• When  (stop) is pressed during playback, the point at which the disc stopped is stored in the memory. When  (play) is pressed, playback resumes from that point.

• For CDs and music files, playback starts from the beginning of the track/file that was playing.

• To cancel the resume playback function, press  (stop) while playback is stopped.

03

2nd

AUDIO

2nd

VIDEO

OPEN/

CLOSE

Note

• Load the disc with the printed side facing up.

• Several dozen seconds are required to read the disc.

Once reading is completed, the type of disc is displayed on the player’s front panel display.

Note

• The resume playback function is canceled automatically in the following cases:

– When the disc tray is opened.

– When the file list window is switched.

– When the power is turned off. (For BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the resume playback function.)

• The resume playback function cannot be used for some discs.

67

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 68 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

03

Forward and reverse scanning

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

During playback, press  or  (LCD page 1) .

Skipping content

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

Press  or  (LCD page 1) .

68

En

 

• The scanning speed switches each time the button is pressed.

The speed steps depend on the disc or file (the speed is displayed on the TV screen).

• Forward or reverse scanning is also possible by holding the button down. Normal playback resumes when the button is released.

Note

• No sound is output when scanning BDs, DVDs and movie files.

• Sound is output when scanning CDs and music files.

• For some discs, normal playback resumes automatically when the chapter switches.

To resume normal playback

Press  (play).

Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks

• When  is pressed, the disc skips ahead to the beginning of the next title/chapter/track/file.

• When  is pressed, the disc skips back to the beginning of the currently playing title/chapter/track/file. Press twice to skip back to the beginning of the previous title/chapter/track/file.

Note

• There are some discs for which skipping is not possible.

Playing in slow motion

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

During playback, press  / or /  (LCD page 1) .

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

Input the number of the title, chapter or track you want to play.

• Use the number buttons (0 to 9) to input the number, then press

ENTER (LCD page 2) .





• The speed switches each time the button is pressed (the speed is displayed on the TV screen). The speed steps depend on the disc or file.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

Note

• For some discs, it is not possible to specify and play titles, chapters or tracks.

• Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input.

Note

• It is not possible to switch the speed during reverse slow motion playback.

• No sound is output during slow motion playback.

• For some discs, normal playback resumes automatically when the chapter switches.

• Reverse slow motion playback is not possible with movie files.

• There are some discs for which slow motion playback is not possible.

To resume normal playback

Press  (play).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 69 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Step forward and step reverse

• Angle mark is displayed for scenes at which multiple angles are recorded.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

While playback is paused, press  / or /  .

Note

• For some discs, the angle can also be switched on the menu screen.

• Angle mark is not displayed if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to Off (page 84).

Switching the subtitles





• The disc moves a step forward or reverse each time the button is pressed.

For discs or files on which multiple subtitles are recorded, the subtitles can be switched during playback.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

During playback, press (LCD page 1) .

Note

• For some discs, normal playback resumes automatically when the chapter switches.

• Reverse step playback is not possible with movie files.

• There are some discs for which step forward/reverse playback is not possible.

To resume normal playback

Press  (play).

Switching the camera angles

For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs on which multiple angles are recorded, the angles can be switched during playback.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

During playback, press (LCD page 1) .

  

• The current subtitle and total number of recorded subtitles are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. When pressed again, the subtitle switches.

Example: Current subtitle/Total number of recorded subtitles

Subtitle

1/2 English

• The subtitles can also be switched using

/

.

• The subtitles can also be switched by selecting Subtitle from the TOOLS menu.

  

• The current angle and total number of recorded angles are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. When pressed again, the angle switches.

Example: Current angle/Total number of recorded angles

Angle

1/4

• The angles can also be switched using

/

.

• The angles can also be switched by selecting Angle from the

TOOLS menu.

Note

• In some cases the subtitle may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately, without the current subtitle or the total number of subtitles recorded on the disc being displayed.

• The types of recorded subtitles depend on the disc and file.

• If the subtitles are not switched when is pressed, switch them from the menu screen.

• This player does not support the display of external subtitle files for DivX.

Turning the subtitles off

Press , then press CLEAR (LCD page 2) .

03

69

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 70 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

03

Switching the audio streams/channels Switching the secondary video

For discs or files on which multiple audio streams/channels are recorded, audio streams/channels can be switched during playback. Also use this procedure to switch the secondary audio for

BD-ROMs on which secondary audio is recorded.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

During playback, press (LCD page 1) .

• To switch the secondary audio, press 2nd AUDIO .

Use the procedure below to switch the secondary video (Picture-in-

Picture) recorded on the BD-ROM.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

During playback, press 2nd VIDEO (LCD page 1) .

70

En

2nd

AUDIO

2nd

VIDEO

OPEN/

CLOSE

2nd

AUDIO

2nd

VIDEO

OPEN/

CLOSE

• The current audio stream/channel and total number of recorded audio streams/channels are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. When pressed again, the audio stream/channel switches.

Example: Current audio stream/Total number of recorded audio streams

Audio

2/2 English

Dolby True HD 96kHz 7.1ch L C R Ls Rs Lb Rb LFE

• The current secondary video stream and total number of recorded secondary video streams are displayed on the TV screen and on the player’s front panel display. When pressed again, the secondary video stream switches.

Example: Current secondary video stream/Total number of recorded secondary video streams

Secondary Video

1/4

• The secondary video streams can also be switched using

/

.

• The secondary video streams can also be switched by selecting

Secondary Video from the TOOLS menu.

• Secondary video mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary video is recorded.

Audio type Number of channels

Channels recorded on disc

• The audio streams/channels can also be switched using

/

.

• The audio streams/channels can also be switched by selecting

Audio or Secondary Audio from the TOOLS menu.

• Secondary audio mark is displayed for scenes at which secondary audio is recorded.

Note

• In some cases the secondary audio may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately, without the current secondary audio or the total number of secondary audio streams recorded on the disc being displayed.

• The types of recorded audio streams/channels depend on the disc and file.

• If the audio stream/channel is not switched when pressed, switch it from the menu screen.

• Some BD-ROMs do not include secondary audio.

• Secondary audio mark is not displayed if Angle/

Secondary Indicator is set to Off (page 84).

is

Note

• In some cases the secondary video may switch or the switching screen provided on the disc may be displayed immediately, without the current secondary video or the total number of secondary video streams recorded on the disc being displayed.

• Some BD-ROMs do not include secondary video.

• Secondary video mark is not displayed if Angle/Secondary

Indicator is set to Off (page 84).

Displaying the disc information

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

Press DISPLAY.

LIGHT

PAGE

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

The disc information appears on the TV screen. The information switches each time the button is pressed.

The information display differs during playback and when playback is stopped.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 71 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Using the Play Mode functions

Playing from a specific time (Time

Search)

1 During playback, press PLAY MODE (LCD page 2) to display the Play Mode screen.

Note

• To play from 45 minutes, input 0 , 0 , 4 , 5 , 0 and 0 , then press

ENTER .

• To play from 1 hour 20 minutes, input 0 , 1 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 0 , then press ENTER .

• Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input.

4 Starting playback from the specified time.

Use

/

to select Search , then press ENTER .

To cancel Time Search

Press PLAY MODE or RETURN .

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CLEAR

0

ENTER

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

RESO-

The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.

2 Select Time Search.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Play Mode

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

A-B Repeat

Repeat/Random

3 Input the time.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or

/

to input the time.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Note

• There are some discs for which Time Search is not available.

Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search)

1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CLEAR

0

ENTER

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

RESO-

The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.

2 Select the type of search.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

See the table on page 74 for the search types.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

A-B Repeat

Repeat/Random

Play Mode

03

Time Search

1 2 : 4 5 : 0 0

Search

71

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 72 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

03

3 Input the number.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) or

/

to input the number.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

Use this procedure to play a specific section within a title or track repeatedly.

1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the Play

Mode screen.

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Title Search

0 3 2

Title Search

4 Starting playback from the specified title, chapter or track.

Use

/

to select Search , then press ENTER .

To cancel the search

Press PLAY MODE or RETURN.

Note

• To search for title 32, input 0 , 3 and 2 , then press ENTER .

• There are some discs for which searching is not available.

• Press CLEAR to clear the values you have input.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7

CLEAR

8

0

9

ENTER

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

RESO-

The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.

2 Select A-B Repeat.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Play Mode

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

A-B Repeat

Repeat/Random

3 Select the starting point for A-B Repeat.

Use

/

to select A (Start) , then press ENTER .

72

En

A-B Repeat A (Start) B (End) Off

4 Select the end point for A-B Repeat.

Use

/

to select B (End) , then press ENTER .

A-B Repeat playback starts.

To cancel A-B Repeat play

• Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER .

• During playback, press  (stop) or CLEAR .

Note

• A-B Repeat play is canceled in the following cases:

– When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs only).

– When you search outside the repeat range.

– When you start other repeat or random play.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 73 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) Playing in random order (Random Play)

03

Use this procedure to play the currently playing disc, title, chapter, track or file repeatedly.

1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the Play

Mode screen.

Use this procedure to play the tracks or files in random order.

1 During playback, press PLAY MODE to display the Play

Mode screen.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CLEAR

0

ENTER

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

RESO-

The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.

2 Select Repeat/Random.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

CLEAR

0

ENTER

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

RESO-

The Play Mode screen can also be displayed by selecting Play Mode from the TOOLS menu.

2 Select Repeat/Random.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

A-B Repeat

Repeat/Random

Play Mode

Play Mode

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

A-B Repeat

Repeat/Random

3 Select the Random Play.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select the type of Repeat Play.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

See the table on page 74 for the types of repeat playback.

Repeat/Random

Repeat/Random

Off

Repeat All

Repeat Track

Random Track

Off

Repeat All

Repeat Track

Random Track

To cancel Repeat Play

• Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER .

• During playback, press  (stop) or CLEAR .

To cancel Random Play

• Select Off from the Repeat/Random screen, then press ENTER .

• During playback, press  (stop) or CLEAR .

Note

• There are some discs and files for which Repeat Play is not available.

• The type of repeat modes depends on the disc and file being played. See the table on page 74.

• Repeat Play is canceled in the following cases:

– When the angle is switched (for BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs only).

– When you search outside the repeat range.

– When you start other repeat or random play.

Note

• There are some discs and files for which Random Play is not available.

• Random Play is canceled in the following cases:

– When you use the search function.

– When you start repeat play.

73

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 74 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

03

About Play Mode types

The functions that can be used differ according to the type of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below.

Play Mode type Mark

1

BD-ROM 2

BD-R

BD-RE

DVD-

Video

2

Disc/file type

DVD-R

DVD-RW

(VR format)

AVCHD Movie file Music file CD

Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat)

       

Playing a title repeatedly (Title

Repeat)

Playing a chapter repeatedly

(Chapter Repeat)

Playing a track or file repeatedly

(Track Repeat)

Playing all the titles, tracks or files on the disc repeatedly (All Repeat)

Playing the tracks or files in random order (Random Track)

 3

 4

 5

 6

Playing from a specific time (Time

Search)

Playing a specific title (Title Search)

Playing a specific chapter (Chapter

Search)

Playing a specific track (Track

Search)

1. During playback in a Play Mode, the type of Play Mode is indicated by the mark.

2. For BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the functions cannot be used with some titles.

3. The original titles are played repeatedly. However, the playlist titles cannot be played repeatedly.

4. The files in the folder are played repeatedly.

5. The files in the folder or HMG Playlist are played repeatedly.

6. The tracks in the disc or HMG Playlist are played repeatedly.

74

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 75 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Playing from the Home Media

Gallery

The Home Media Gallery lets you display a list of the titles, tracks or files recorded on the disc. The discs that can be played from the

Home Media Gallery are as shown below (see also page 58).

• BD-R/-RE discs

• DVDs recorded in VR format

• Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs)

• DVDs/CDs on which only data files of movie or music files, etc. are recorded

Playing discs

3 Select the title or track to be played.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

BD-R BDAV

My Favorite TV Program

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

10 items

Morning serial drama

News at noon

Evening movie

Midnight variety show

Playback protection

World heritage

Drama: Blank time

Music and us

Title Total : 0 h 54 m 30 s

Recording Date : 11/11/2008

Original

Playback starts.

Closing the Home Media Gallery

Press HMG (or HOME MENU ).

1 Press HMG (LCD page 1) to display the Home Media Gallery.





MENU

The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home

Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressing ENTER .

2 Select the disc.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

Note

• When playing a music CD (CD-DA or DTS-CD), the Now Playing screen is displayed.

• Some BD-R/-RE discs have playback protection. To cancel the protection, input the password set for the disc.

• To play DVD-R/-RW (VR format) playlists, switch to the playlist using the Original/Play List command on the TOOLS menu

(page 64).

Playing movie files

1 Press HMG to display the Home Media Gallery.

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

BD-R BDAV

HMG Playlist

Home Media Gallery

BD PLAYER

Search for the part you want to play from a list of the disc's content.





MENU

The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home

Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressing ENTER .

2 Select the disc.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

DVD-RW

HMG Playlist

Home Media Gallery

BD PLAYER

03

Search for the part you want to play from a list of the disc's content.

75

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 76 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

03

3 Select Movies.

Use

/

to select Movies , then press ENTER .

DVD-RW

Movies

Music

Note

• It may take a few seconds before playback starts. This is normal.

• It may not be possible to play some files properly.

• The number of views may be restricted (page 60).

Playing music files

1 Press HMG to display the Home Media Gallery.

View available movies.

4 Select Folders or All Movies.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

• Folders – The files in the selected folder are displayed.

• All Movies – All the recorded files are displayed.

Movies

DVD-RW

Folders

All Movies

If you have selected All Movies , proceed to step 6.

5 Select the folder containing the file you want to play.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

15 items

Movie Folder001

Movie Folder002

Movie Folder003

Movie Folder004

Movie005.divx

Movie006.divx

Movie007.divx

Movie008.divx

Folders

DVD-RW/Movies

A list of the files and/or the sub-folders in the selected folder is displayed.

6 Select and set the file you want to play.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

20 items

Movie Folder001

DVD-RW/Movies/Folders

Movie001.divx

Movie002.divx

Movie003.divx

Movie004.divx

Movie005.divx

Movie006.divx

Movie007.divx

Movie008.divx

76

En

Playback starts.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine





MENU

The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home

Media Gallery from Home Menu then pressing ENTER .

2 Select the disc.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

CD-ROM

HMG Playlist

Home Media Gallery

BD PLAYER

Search for the part you want to play from a list of the disc's content.

3 Select Music.

Use

/

to select Music , then press ENTER .

CD-ROM

Movies

Music

View available music.

LX01BD_2.book Page 77 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

4 Select Folders or All Songs.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

• Folders – The files in the selected folder are displayed.

• All Songs – All the recorded files are displayed.

Music

CD-ROM

Folders

All Songs

Playing in the desired order (HMG

Playlist)

The discs that can add tracks and files to the HMG (Home Media

Gallery) Playlist are as shown below.

• Music CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs)

• DVDs/CDs on which music files are recorded

Adding tracks/files

Use this procedure to add tracks and files, and create the HMG

Playlist.

1 Press HMG to display the Home Media Gallery.

03

If you have selected All Songs , proceed to step 6.

5 Select the folder containing the file you want to play.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

15 items

Music Folder001

Music Folder002

Music Folder003

Music Folder004

Music005.mp3

Music006.mp3

Music007.mp3

Music008.mp3

Folders

CD-ROM/Music

A list of the files and/or the sub-folders in the selected folder is displayed.

6 Select and set the file you want to play.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

20 items

Music Folder001

CD-ROM/Music/Folders

Music001.mp3

Music002.mp3

Music003.mp3

Music004.mp3

Music005.mp3

Music006.mp3

Music007.mp3

Music008.mp3





MENU

The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home

Media Gallery from Home Menu pressing ENTER .

2 Select the disc.

Load the disc beforehand.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

CD-ROM

HMG Playlist

Home Media Gallery

BD PLAYER

Playback starts. The Now Playing screen (shown below) is displayed.

Currently playing file

Elapsed time

Play 0.02.33

Music 001.mp3

DATA DISC

0.05.34

Total file playing time

Search for the part you want to play from a list of the disc's content.

3 Select the track/file to be added.

Use

/

to select.

Folders

CD-ROM/Music

15 items

Music001.mp3

Music002.mp3

Music003.mp3

Music004.mp3

Music005.mp3

Music006.mp3

Music007.mp3

Music008.mp3

77

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 78 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

03

4 Press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu.

DISPLAY LIGHT

PAGE

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

2 Select HMG Playlist.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

CD-ROM

HMG Playlist

Home Media Gallery

BD PLAYER

5 Select Add to HMG Playlist.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

Folders

CD-ROM/Music

Music001.mp3

Music002.mp3

Music003.mp3

Music004.mp3

Music005.mp3

TOOLS

15Items

Music007.mp3

Music008.mp3

Play from Beginning

Add to HMG Playlist

Now Playing

The track or file selected in step 3 is added to the HMG Playlist.

To add more tracks or files, repeat steps 3 to 5.

To add the currently playing track/file to the HMG Playlist

While the track/file is playing, press TOOLS to display the

TOOLS menu.

Use

/

to select Add to HMG Playlist, then press ENTER.

Note

• A maximum of 24 tracks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist.

• The HMG Playlist is cleared in the following cases:

– When the power is turned off.

– When the disc tray is opened.

Playing the HMG Playlist

1 Press HMG to display the Home Media Gallery.





MENU

The Home Media Gallery can also be displayed by selecting Home

Media Gallery from Home Menu pressing ENTER .

Display the HMG Playlist.

3 Select the track/file to be played.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

HMG Playlist

CD-ROM

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

21 items

Track15.mp3

Track07.mp3

Track03.mp3

Track16.mp3

Track08.mp3

Track05.mp3

Track10.mp3

Track03.mp3

Playback starts. The Now Playing screen (shown below) is displayed.

Currently playing track/file

Elapsed time

Play 0.02.33

Music 001.mp3

DATA DISC

0.05.34

HMG

Total track/file playing time

Press  (stop) to stop playback. When playback of a music CD is stopped, the Now Playing screen turns off. When playback of a music file is stopped, the HMG Playlist screen reappears.

Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist

Select the track/file to be deleted, then press TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu.

Use

/

to select Delete from HMG Playlist, then press

ENTER.

78

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 79 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Chapter 4

Adjusting audio and video

Important

• Press BD (HDMI 1) to set the remote control to BD control mode in order to operate the Blu-ray disc player.

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

TV

FM / AM

• The BD settings are listed on two separate pages. To cycle between pages, use the PAGE button.

Adjusting the video

The quality of the playback picture can be adjusted according to the

TV you are using.

1 During playback, press VIDEO ADJ (LCD page 2) to display the Video Adjust screen.

• Professional – With this setting, video signal processing is restrained. Select this when connected to a professional monitor.

• Memory1 to 3 – Picture quality settings with adjusted parameters can be stored in the memory. For a description of the parameters, see When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected below.

When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected

1 Select Adjustments.

Use

to select Adjustments , then press ENTER .

A detailed settings screen appears.

2 Select the item to be adjusted.

Use

/

to select.

Video Adjust [ Memory1 ]

Prog. Motion Motion

Pure Cinema Auto1

YNR

CNR

BNR

Off

Off

Off

Still

Max

Max

Max

MNR

1/2 Page

Off Max

Use [ ][ ] to adjust the picture to progressive scan.

1 2 3

4

7

CLEAR

5

8

0

6

9

ENTER

PLAY

MODE

VIDEO

ADJ

RESO-

The Video Adjust screen can also be displayed by selecting Video

Adjust from the TOOLS menu.

2 Select a preset.

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Select using

/

according to the TV being used.

Video Adjust

PDP

Adjustments

• LCD – Select this when connected to a liquid crystal display TV.

• PDP – Select this when connected to a plasma TV of another brand.

• Pioneer PDP – Select this when connected to a Pioneer plasma

TV.

• Projector – Select this when connected to a front projector.

3 Adjust the picture quality.

When

/

are pressed, the adjustments can be made watching the picture. The detailed settings screen reappears when ENTER is pressed.

Prog. Motion Motion Still

• Prog.Motion

– Adjust according to the type of image (movie or still image). This is effective when outputting video materials as progressive images.

• Pure Cinema – This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to Auto1 . If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to

Auto 2 , On or Off (page 80).

• YNR – Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.

• CNR – Reduces noise in the chroma (C) signal.

• BNR – Reduces the block noise (block-shaped distortion generated upon MPEG compression).

• MNR – Reduces the mosquito noise (distortion along the contours of the picture generated upon MPEG compression).

• Detail – Emphasizes the picture’s contours.

• White Level – Adjusts the level of the white portions.

• Black Level – Adjusts the level of the black portions.

• Black Setup – Select the black level as the setup level. Normally select 0 IRE . If the black is too dense and all the dark colors are displayed in a uniform black due to the combination with the connected monitor, select 7.5 IRE .

• Gamma Correction – Adjusts how the dark portions of the picture look.

• Hue – Adjusts the balance between green and red.

• Chroma Level – Adjusts the density of the colors.

79

En

04

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 80 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

04

Note

• Prog.Motion

and Pure Cinema have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (576i/480i or 1080i signals).

• Prog.Motion

is disabled when Pure Cinema is set to On .

• Black Setup have the effect only for pictures output from the

VIDEO and S-VIDEO output terminals, and for NTSC signals output.

• YNR , CNR , BNR and MNR are disabled when 1080/24p signals are output from the HDMI OUT terminal.

Closing the Video Adjust screen

Press HOME MENU .

About Pure Cinema

There are two types of video signals:

• Video material – Video signals recorded at 25 or 30 frames/ second

• Film material – Video signals recorded at 24 frames/second

“Pure Cinema” uses signal processing suited for “film material” when converting 576i/480i or 1080i interlaced video signals into progressive video signals, resulting in clear picture reproduction without losing the quality of the material.

is displayed on the disc information screen when playing the

“film material” pictures of DVD-Video discs (page 70).

Adjusting the Audio DRC

3 Adjust the setting.

Use

/

to switch between Off , Low , Medium , High and Auto .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Audio DRC

Off

Adjust the audio dynamic range. This setting is ineffective depending on the playing audio.

Closing the Audio DRC screen

Press ENTER or HOME MENU .

Note

• This only affects the Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby

Digital audio signals of BDs, DVDs and movie files.

• When Auto is selected, the setting has the same effect as High or Off for Dolby TrueHD signals, depending on the content. For

Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital, the setting has the same effect as Off .

• Audio DRC affects the audio signals output from the following audio output terminals:

– Analog audio signals output from the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) or

AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals.

– Linear PCM audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminals or HDMI OUT terminal.

• The effect may be weak for some discs.

Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) has the effect of playing loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly. Adjust the setting for example when watching movies late at night and the dialogs are difficult to hear.

1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu.

Press TOOLS .

DISPLAY LIGHT

PAGE

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

2 Select and set Audio DRC.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

BD PLAYER

TOOLS

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Audio

Subtitle

Audio DRC

Video Adjust

Output Video Resolution

80

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 81 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Chapter 5

Advanced settings

Important

• Press BD (HDMI 1) to set the remote control to BD control mode in order to operate the Blu-ray disc player.

INPUT

SELECT

HDMI 2

DVR

HDMI 3

DVD

 

TV

FM / AM

3 Select the item and change the setting.

Use

/

/

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Closing the Initial Setup screen

Press HOME MENU .

• The BD settings are listed on two separate pages. To cycle between pages, use the PAGE button.

Changing the settings (Initial

Setup)

Operating the Initial Setup screen

1 When playback is stopped, display the Home Menu screen.

Press HOME MENU .

HOME

MENU RETURN

2 Select and set Initial Setup.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

HOME MENU

BD PLAYER

Home Media Gallery

Initial Setup

RETURN

Set up the player for use.

05

81

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 82 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

05

Note

• Items that cannot be changed are indicated in gray. The items that can be selected depend on the player’s status.

• In Options, the factory default settings are indicated in bold.

Setting

TV Aspect Ratio

Options

16:9 (Widescreen)

4:3 (Standard)

Explanation

Select this when connected to a wide (16:9) TV.

Select this when connected to a conventional TV.

4:3 Video Out

DVD 16:9 Video Out

Full

Normal

Letter Box

Pan & Scan

4:3 pictures are displayed over the entire screen.

4:3 pictures are displayed with black bands along the sides. Select this when you cannot switch the aspect ratio to 4:3 on the TV.

16:9 pictures are displayed with black bands at the top and bottom when watching on a 4:3 screen.

The picture is displayed over the entire screen, with the left and right sides of the 16:9 picture cut off. Select this to watch 4:3 pictures over the entire screen.

NTSC on PAL TV Select this when connected to the PAL-only TV. When playing the materials with the frame/ field rate other than 50 Hz, the PAL-only TV can display correctly.

Off Select this when multi-system (NTSC-compatible) TV.

Many recent PAL TVs support the input of NTSC signals. Therefore, this can be set to Off . Check also the operating instructions of your TV.

Still Picture

On

Field

Frame

This eliminates instability of the picture when playback is paused.

This makes pictures clear when playback is paused, but instability may be observed.

Dolby Digital Out

* Only valid for digital audio outputs.

DTS Out

* Only valid for digital audio outputs.

AAC Out

* Only valid for digital audio outputs.

DTS Downmix

Audio Output Mode

* Only valid for analog audio outputs.

Speaker Setup

* Only valid for analog audio outputs.

Channel Level

* Only valid for analog audio outputs.

Auto

Dolby Digital 1

Dolby Digital 2

Dolby Digital

PCM

Field or Frame is switched automatically according to the disc or file being played.

Dolby Digital audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output.

Dolby Digital audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the signals are output without mixing the secondary audio and interactive audio signals.

Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not compatible with Dolby

Digital audio signals. The Dolby Digital audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output.

DTS 1

DTS 2

DTS

AAC

PCM

DTS Digital Surround audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the secondary audio and interactive audio are mixed for output.

DTS Digital Surround audio signals are output. With BD-ROMs, the signals are output without mixing the secondary audio and interactive audio signals.

Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not compatible with DTS

Digital Surround audio signals. The DTS Digital Surround audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output.

Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compatible with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio signals are output.

AAC

Stereo

PCM Select this when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is not compatible with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio signals are converted into linear PCM audio signals for output.

DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Digital

Surround audio signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are converted into 2-channel

(stereo) signals for output.

Lt/Rt

2 Channel

Multi-channel

DTS-HD Master Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals or DTS Digital

Surround audio signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are converted into 2-channel signals compatible with Dolby Surround for output (when the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is compatible with Dolby Pro Logic, the AV receiver or amplifier outputs the linear PCM audio signals as surround audio signals).

Select this when the TV’s analog 2-channel (stereo) audio input terminals are connected to the player’s AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals.

Select this when the multi-channel audio input terminals of an AV receiver or amplifier, etc., are connected to the player’s AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals.

When an AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is connected to the player’s AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals, this sets whether or not to use the speakers which are connected to the AV receiver or amplifier, as well as the size of the speakers. For details, see Changing the speaker setup on page 85.

Fix

Variable

The output for the various speakers is set to the maximum.

The output level of the various speakers is set within the range of –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (in 0.5 dB steps) (page 85).

82

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 83 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Setting Options

HDMI High-Speed Transmission On

Explanation

Select this when connected with a High Speed HDMI™ cable (page 91).

Off Select this when connected with a Standard HDMI™ cable (page 91).

The player’s setting screen is closed if the output video resolution is switched by changing the HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting.

When HDMI High-Speed Transmission is set to On , use the supplied HDMI cable.

HDMI Color Space Auto The video signal that is output (YCbCr or RGB) is switched automatically.

YCbCr 4:4:4

YCbCr 4:2:2

Select this to output the video signals as YCbCr 4:4:4 signals.

Select this to output the video signals as YCbCr 4:2:2 signals.

RGB (16 to 235)

RGB (0 to 255)

Select this to output the video signals as RGB signals. Choose this if the colors seem too dense and all the dark colors are displayed in a uniform black when RGB (0 to 255) is selected.

Select this to output the video signals as RGB signals. Choose this if the colors seem too faint and the black seems too bright when RGB (16 to 235) is selected.

Normally it is recommended to set this to Auto . When set to Auto , the optimum video signals for your TV are output.

HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals are output with as many audio channels as possible. In cases when the number of channels does not decrease when the signals are output as such without converting them to linear PCM, they are output as such (page 90).

PCM Select this when you want the secondary audio and interactive audio signals to be mixed for output or when you want to output prioritizing sampling frequency over the number of channels (page 90).

Enables PQLS function (page 92).

PQLS

HDMI Control

Auto

Off

On

Off

Disables PQLS function (page 92).

Select this to control the player with the remote control of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable. Also refer to About HDMI Control function on page 92.

Select this when you do not want to control the player with the remote control of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable.

Select this to set the language of the on-screen displays to English.

OSD Language

Audio Language

* For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language.

Subtitle Language

English available languages

English available languages

Other

English

* For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language.

available languages

Choose a language for the on-screen displays from the listed languages.

Select this to set both the BD-ROM and DVD-Video default audio language to English.

Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default audio language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback.

Continue to the next screen to set the default audio language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback. You can select the language name or enter the code number (see page 100 for the code table). If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.

Select this to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback to

English.

Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default subtitle language for BD-

ROM and DVD-Video playback.

Other Continue to the next screen to set the default subtitle language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video playback. You can select the language name or enter the code number (see page 100 for the code table). If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.

BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang.

* For some discs, it may not be possible to change to the selected language.

w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language.

available languages Choose a language from the listed languages to set the default language for BD-ROM and

DVD-Video menus.

Other Continue to the next screen to set the default menu language for BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. You can select the language name or enter the code number (see page 100 for the code table). If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.

Subtitle Display On

Off

Select this to display the subtitles.

Select this if you do not want to display the subtitles. Note that on some discs the subtitles are displayed by force.

Set Password (Change Password) Register (change) the password for parental lock settings or for unlocking to play DVD-Video with parental lock feature. For details, see Registering or Changing the password on page 86.

DVD-Video Parental Lock Change the player’s parental lock level. For details, see Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs on page 87.

BDMV Parental Lock

Country Code

Change the restricted age. For details, see Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs on page 87.

Change the Country/Area code. Refer to the Changing the Country/Area code on page 88.

05

83

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 84 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

05 Setting

Output Terminal Priority

On Screen Display

Angle/Secondary Indicator

Hybrid Disc Playback

BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority

Options Explanation

Select the terminals for outputting video and audio signals with priority. For details, see Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals (Output Terminal Priority) on page 89.

On

Off

Select this to display the operation indicators (Play, Stop, etc.) on the TV screen.

Select this if you do not want to display the operation indicators (Play, Stop, etc.) on the TV screen.

On

Off

Select this to display the angle mark, secondary video mark and secondary audio mark on the TV screen (pages 69 and 70).

Select this if you do not want to display the angle mark, secondary video mark and secondary audio mark on the TV screen.

BD

DVD

CD

BDMV

The BD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD or CD) is played.

The DVD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and DVD) is played. If there is no

DVD layer, the BD layer is played.

The CD layer of hybrid discs with two or more layers (BD and CD) is played. If there is no CD layer, the BD layer is played.

Select this to play the BDMV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV formats.

DivX VOD

Auto Power Off

Setup Navigator

BDAV Select this to play the BDAV format on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV formats.

Registration Code

On

Displays the player’s registration code required to play DivX VOD files (page 60).

Select this to turn the power off automatically (the power turns off automatically if no operation is performed for over 30 minutes).

Select this if you do not want the power to turn off automatically.

Off

Start making the settings using the Setup Navigator menu. For details, see Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu on page 62.

Changing to other language at language setting

Note

• Refer to Language Code Table on page 100.

• If a language not recorded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the recorded languages is automatically selected and played.

1 Select and set Other.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

2 Change the language.

Use

/

to change, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

84

En

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

To change the language using numbers

1 Use

/

to select Number.

2 Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) to input the number, then press ENTER.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 85 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Changing the speaker setup

Set whether or not to use the speakers which are connected to the

AV receiver or amplifier, as well as the size of the speakers. This setting is only valid for analog audio outputs.

Closing the speaker settings screen

Press ENTER .

Adjusting the output level of the various speakers (Channel Level)

Note

• Normally there is no need to perform this setting on this system.

• Select Initial Setup from the HOME MENU, then press ENTER .

1 Select and set Speakers.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

Adjust each output level of the different speakers by using test tones.

This setting is only valid for analog audio outputs.

1 Select and set Speakers.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

RETURN

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Caution

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Audio Output Mode

Speaker Setup

Channel Level

2 Select and set Speaker Setup

Next Screen.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

• This cannot be selected when Audio Output Mode is set to

2 Channel . Change the setting to Multi-channel (page 82).

3 Select the speaker and change the setting.

Use

/

to select, then use

/

to change the setting.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

L/R

C

SL/SR

SBL/SBR

Large

Yes

Yes

Yes

Speaker Setup

BD PLAYER

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

Multi-channel

Fix

2

Use

Fix

/

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Audio Output Mode

Speaker Setup

Channel Level

to select, then press

HOME

MENU

SETUP

ENTER .

RETURN

Multi-channel

Fix

Select and set Channel Level, then Fix or Variable.

– The output level of all the speakers is set to the maximum.

• Variable – The output level of all the speakers is set 6.0 dB lower than when Fix is selected. From this point, the output levels of the L , C , R , SL , SR , SBL , SBR and SW speakers can be adjusted within the range of –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB.

• If you have selected Variable , proceed to step 3.

Caution

• This cannot be selected when Audio Output Mode is set to

2 Channel . Change the setting to Multi-channel (page 82).

3 Select and set the method for switching the speaker to be adjusted.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

Use [ ][ ] to select a speaker, then press [ ][ ] to select speaker option.

• L/R (front left and right speakers): Small / Large (this setting also applies to the C, SL/SR and SBL/SBR speakers)

• C (center speaker): Yes / No

• SL/SR (left and right surround speakers): Yes / No

• SBL/SBR (left and right surround back speakers): Yes / No

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Speaker Setup

BD PLAYER

Test Tone Switching

Select whether test tone output is switched automatically or manually.

Auto Manual

05

85

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 86 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

05

Auto – Switch the speaker to be adjusted automatically.

Manual – Switch the speaker to be adjusted manually.

Caution

• Test tones are output. Lower the volume of the device connected to the player.

• The volume of the test tones output from the subwoofer may seem lower than the tones output from the other channels.

4 Adjust the output level.

Use

/

to select,

/

to adjust.

Channel Level

BD PLAYER

L

C

R

SR

SBR

SBL

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

SL

SW

0.0 dB

0.0 dB

Use [ ][ ] to select a speaker, then press [ ][ ] to adjust the channel level and then press ENTER.

3 Input the password.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) or

/

to input the number, then press ENTER to set.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

CLEAR

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Set Password

Enter new password

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

Note

• When Auto is selected, the speaker cannot be selected with

/

. In this case, test tones are not output from the subwoofer.

Closing the Channel Level screen

Press ENTER .

Registering or Changing the password

Use this procedure to register or change the code number required for the Parental Lock settings.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

1 Select and set Parental Lock.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

4 Re-input the password.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) or

/

to input the number, then press ENTER to set.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Set Password

Enter new password

Re-enter

To change the code number

Input the previously registered password, then input the new password.

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Note

• We recommend making a note of the password.

• If you forget the password, reset the player to the factory default setting, then register the password again (page 89).

86

En

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Set Password

DVD-Video Parental Lock

BDMV Parental Lock

Country Code

Off

255 us

2 Select and set Set Password

Next Screen.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 87 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Changing the Age Restriction for watching BD-ROMs

For BD-ROMs containing scenes of violence, for example, watching can be restricted by setting an age restriction for the BD-ROMs.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

1 Select and set Parental Lock.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU TOOLS

DISC

NAVIGATOR

MENU

4 Change the age.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) or

/

to input the number, then press ENTER to set.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

BDMV Parental Lock

Age Restriction

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Note

• When Age Restriction is set to 255 , watching is not restricted.

Changing the Parental Lock level for watching DVDs

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Set Password

DVD-Video Parental Lock

BDMV Parental Lock

Country Code

Off

255 us

2 Select and set BDMV Parental Lock

Next Screen.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Input the password.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) or

/

to input the number, then press ENTER to set.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Some DVD-Video discs containing scenes of violence, for example, have Parental Lock levels (check the indications on the disc’s jacket or elsewhere). To restrict watching these discs, set the player’s level to the level lower than the discs.

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

1 Select and set Parental Lock.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

05

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

CLEAR

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

BDMV Parental Lock

Enter the password

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Set Password

DVD-Video Parental Lock

BDMV Parental Lock

Country Code

Off

255 us

2 Select and set DVD-Video Parental Lock

Next Screen.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

87

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 88 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

05

3 Input the password.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) or

/

to input the number, then press ENTER to set.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Changing the Country/Area code

BD

DVD

AVCHD

CD

Movie files

Music files

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

CLEAR

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

DVD-Video Parental Lock

Enter the password

4 Change the level.

Use

/

to change, then press ENTER to set.

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

DVD-Video Parental Lock

Level Off

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

Note

• Refer to Country/Area Code Table on page 100.

1 Select and set Parental Lock.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Set Password

DVD-Video Parental Lock

BDMV Parental Lock

Country Code

Off

255 us

2 Select and set Country/Area Code.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Input the password.

Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) or

/

to input the number, then press ENTER to set.

Use

/

to move the cursor.

Note

• The level can be set to Off or between Level1 and Level8 . When set to Off , watching is not restricted.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

CLEAR

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME

MENU

SETUP

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Country Code

Enter the password

TOOLS

MENU

RETURN

88

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 89 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

4 Change the country/area code.

Use

/

to change, then press ENTER to set.

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Country Code

Code

Number

To change the country/area code using numbers

1 Use

/

to select Number.

2 Use the number buttons (0 to 9) (LCD page 2) to input the number, then press ENTER.

Changing the terminals for outputting video and audio signals

(Output Terminal Priority)

Set the video and audio terminals to be used.

1 Select and set Options.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Output Terminal Priority

On Screen Display

Angle/Secondary Indicator

Hybrid Disc Playback

BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority

DivX VOD

Auto Power Off

On

On

BD

BDAV

On

2 Select and set Output Terminal Priority

Next Screen.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

3 Select the terminal for outputting video signals.

Use

/

to select, then press

.

When a digital output is selected for the video output terminal,

Video is fixed at HDMI and cannot be changed.

When an analog output is selected for the video output terminal,

Component Video or S-Video/Video can be selected for Video .

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

TOOLS

MENU

HOME

MENU

SETUP

RETURN

Video Out

Audio Out

Speakers

HDMI

Language

Parental Lock

Options

Setup Navigator

Initial Setup

BD PLAYER

Output Terminal Priority

Video S-Video/Video

Audio Analog Audio

• HDMI – HDMI OUT terminal

• Component Video – COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals

• S-Video/Video – S-VIDEO output terminal or VIDEO output terminal

The video and audio signals output from the set output terminals are output synchronously (lip synchronization).

Caution

• If the output terminal you want to select at Video is not displayed, use the VIDEO SELECT button to switch between digital and analog output (page 65).

4 Select the terminal for outputting audio signals.

Use

/

to select, then press ENTER .

• HDMI – HDMI OUT terminal

• Digital Audio – DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) terminal

• Analog Audio – AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals or AUDIO OUT

(7.1 ch) terminals

The optimum audio signals for the audio format and the player’s settings are output from the output terminal(s) set here.

Caution

• Linear PCM (2-channel) audio signals are output from the audio terminals other than the one set at Audio , regardless of the audio format and the player’s settings.

Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings

05

1 Check that the player’s power is turned on.

2 When a disc is playing, press  STOP to stop playback.

Eject the disc from the player.

3 While pressing  STOP, press  STANDBY/ON.

Operate using the buttons on the player’s front panel.

Note

• After restoring all the settings to the factory default settings, use

Setup Navigator to reset the player (page 62).

89

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 90 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

05

About the audio output settings

The audio signals that are output differ according to the audio format recorded on the disc and the player’s settings. Check on the table below.

AUDIO OUT terminal DIGITAL OUT terminal

HDMI OUT terminal

1

Audio format

2ch

2

Multi-channel

2

Converted to linear PCM audio

3

Not converted to linear PCM audio

4,5

PCM

6

Auto

6,7,8

BD-ROM Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

7.1-channel audio

9

Dolby Digital 7.1-channel audio

9,10

DTS Digital

Surround

DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio

DTS-HD Master

Audio

Linear PCM

Converted to

2-channel audio

Converted to

2-channel audio

5.1-channel audio

5.1-channel audio

12

7.1-channel audio

9

5.1-channel audio

Converted to

2-channel audio

Converted to

2-channel audio

DTS Digital

Surround

Converted to

2-channel audio

Dolby Digital

MPEG-2 AAC

5.1-channel audio

5.1-channel audio

12

7.1-channel audio

9,10

5.1-channel audio

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

11

DTS Digital

Surround

DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio

DTS-HD Master

Audio

13

7.1-channel audio

9,10

Dolby Digital

MPEG-2 AAC

BD-R/

-RE

DVD-

Video

Dolby Digital

MPEG-2 AAC

MPEG

Linear PCM

Dolby Digital

DTS Digital

Surround

MPEG

Linear PCM

DVD (VR format)

Dolby Digital

MPEG

Linear PCM

Converted to

2-channel audio

Converted to

2-channel audio

5.1-channel audio

5.1channel audio

2-channel audio

Converted to

2-channel audio

Converted to

2-channel audio

Dolby Digital

DTS Digital

Surround

2-channel audio

Dolby Digital

2-channel audio

5.1-channel audio

5.1-channel audio

Dolby Digital

DTS Digital

Surround

Dolby Digital

1. When outputting linear PCM audio signals, if the number of compatible channels of the connected HDMI device is lower, the signals are output with the number of channels for which the device is compatible.

2. When Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel or Multi-channel (page 82).

3. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital  PCM , DTS Out is set to DTS  PCM , or AAC Out is set to AAC  PCM (page 82).

4. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital 1 / Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 1 / DTS 2 or AAC Out is set to AAC (page 82).

5. When outputting Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround bitstream with settings of Dolby Digital 2 at Dolby Digital Out , DTS 2 at DTS Out , the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed for output.

6. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM or Auto (page 83).

7. When outputting the bitstream of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or DTS Digital Surround, the secondary audio and interactive audio signals are not mixed.

8. If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus bitstream, the signals are output in Dolby Digital bitstream.

If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the signals are output in DTS Digital Surround bitstream.

If the connected HDMI device is not compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround bitstream, the signals are output in linear PCM.

9. Only compatible with 7.1-channel surround back. 6.1-channel surround back is output in 7.1 channels. In other cases, output as audio signals of 5.1-channels or less.

10. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p, the signals may be output in 2 channel, depending on HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 91).

11. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p, the signals may be output in Dolby Digital bitstream, depending on HDMI High-Speed Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 91).

12. DTS Digital Surround signals converted to linear PCM audio signals are output.

13. When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/480p, the signals may be output in DTS Digital Surround bitstream, depending on HDMI High-Speed

Transmission setting and/or the connected HDMI device (page 91).

Caution

• Linear PCM audio signals (2 channels) are output from all terminals other than the ones selected at Audio under Output Terminal

Priority , regardless of the audio format or the player’s settings (pages 62 and 89).

• The audio signals output from the DIGITAL OUT terminals have a sampling frequency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz for CDs).

• MPEG audio is output in linear PCM.

90

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 91 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Chapter 6

Other player connections

Connecting a TV

Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet whenever making or changing connections.

Note

• Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 62).

Connecting using the HDMI cable

The audio and video signals can be transferred to HDMI-compatible devices as digital signals with no loss of sound or video quality. After connecting, make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu according to the connected HDMI-compatible device (page 62).

Normally, the TV is connected to this player via the receiver subwoofer.

Also refer to Basic connections on page 12 and Making the HDMI

Control connections on page 45.

Note

• The HDMI indicator on the player’s front panel lights when an

HDMI-compatible device is connected. (Depending on the connected device, in some cases it may only light when the player is selected as the device’s input.)

• 1080p video signals may not be output, depending on the HDMI cable being used.

Caution

• Hold the plug when connecting and disconnecting the cable.

• Placing a load on the plug could result in faulty contact and no video signals being output.

About HDMI

This player incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface

(HDMI™) technology.

The player supports Deep Color.

The conventional players can transmit a video signal with 8 bit color depth in the YCbCr 4:4:4 or RGB formats, the players supporting

Deep Color can transmit a video signal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. Subtle color gradations can be reproduced when connected to a TV that supports Deep Color.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.

Audio signals that can be transferred with the player’s HDMI output terminal

• Dolby TrueHD

• Dolby Digital Plus

• Dolby Digital

• DTS-HD Master Audio

• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

• DTS Digital Surround

• MPEG-2 AAC

• Linear PCM

Linear PCM audio signals meeting the following conditions can be output:

– Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz

– Number of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sampling frequency)

For details, see About the audio output settings on page 90.

About the HDMI high speed transmission

This player outputs 1080/50p, 1080/60p and Deep Color video signals.

If your TV supports 1080/50p, 1080/60p or Deep Color signals, use a

High Speed HDMI™ cable or the supplied HDMI cable in order to take advantage of the maximum performance the player and TV can offer.

Also set HDMI High-Speed Transmission to On (page 83).

High Speed HDMI™ cables are tested to carry signals up to 1080p.

1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p, 1080/60i, 1080/60p and 720/

60p video signals that are capable of Deep Color can also be carried.

Note

• Set HDMI High-Speed Transmission to Off when using an

HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI™ cable (a Standard

HDMI™ cable).

• The following restrictions apply when HDMI High-Speed

Transmission is set to Off :

– Deep Color signals are not output.

– If output video resolution is set to Auto , the signals are output with a resolution of 1080/50i or 1080/60i when TV’s preferred resolution is 1080/50p or 1080/60p.

– When the output video resolution is set to 576i/480i or 576p/

480p , Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio signals are not output as such. They are either output as Dolby Digital or

DTS Digital Surround signals or converted into linear PCM.

Also, 96 kHz and 192 kHz multi-channel linear PCM audio signals cannot be output. They are output as 2-channel signals (page 90).

• When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer is connected, it may not operate properly.

About HDCP

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a copyright protection system by which digital video signals are encrypted.

When connected to a DVI device

• It is not possible to connect DVI devices (computer displays, for example) that are not compatible with HDCP.

91

En

06

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 92 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

06

• No audio signals are output. Connect using an audio cable

(included), etc.

• This player is designed for connection with HDMI-compatible devices. When connected to a DVI device, it may not operate properly depending on the DVI device.

About HDMI Control function

• When the player is connected to a Pioneer Flat Screen TV or this receiver subwoofer, supporting the HDMI Control function, it can be operated from the Flat Screen TV or this receiver subwoofer.

• The Flat Screen TV’s input is switched automatically when playback is started on the player or the Home Menu or the Home

Media Gallery is displayed. When the input is switched, the playback picture, the Home Menu or the Home Media Gallery appears on the Flat Screen TV (Auto-select function). If the Flat

Screen TV’s power is being turned off at this time, it may turn on automatically (Simultaneous power function). When the language information from a connected Flat Screen TV is received, you can have the player’s on-screen display language change automatically to that of the Flat Screen TV (Unified language function). This function is available only when playback is stopped and the menu screen is not displayed.

• Also refer to the operating instructions of the Flat Screen TV, etc.

To use the HDMI Control function

• The HDMI Control function operates when HDMI Control is set to On for all devices connected with HDMI cables. Once connections and the settings of all the devices are finished, be sure to check that the player’s picture is output to the Flat

Screen TV. (Also check after changing the connected devices and reconnecting HDMI cables.) The HDMI Control function may not operate properly if the player’s picture is not properly output to the Flat Screen TV.

• Use High Speed HDMI™ cables when using the HDMI Control function. The HDMI Control function may not operate properly if other HDMI cables are used.

• The function name of KURO LINK used on the web and in catalogs is referred to as HDMI Control in the operating instructions and on the player.

About PQLS function

The PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a transfer control technology using the HDMI Control function. The player’s output signals are controlled from the AV receiver or amplifier to achieve high quality sound playback using the quartz oscillator of AV receiver or amplifier. This eliminates the influence of the jitter generated upon transfer which can adversely affect the sound quality.

• The PQLS function is only activated when the player is connected to a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function via HDMI connection.

• The PQLS function is only activated when playing a music CD

(CD-DA).

• The PQLS function is activated when the player is set as follows

(page 83):

HDMI Control : On

PQLS : Auto

• Also refer to the operating instructions of AV receiver or amplifier.

Caution

• This receiver subwoofer does not support the PQLS function. To use the PQLS function, use a compatible AV receiver or amplifier.

• If the output video resolution is switched when playing a music

CD (CD-DA), the PQLS function does not work. This function will work again after playback stops and restarts.

92

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 93 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Connecting to a TV with no HDMI input

To audio input terminals

TV

To component video input terminals

To video input terminal

To S-Video input terminal

06

R

AUDIO OUT ( 2 ch )

L

R

L

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER

AUDIO OUT ( 7.1 ch )

SUB WOOFER

CONTROL

IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

Y

PB

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

PR

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

HDMI cable

(included)

AC IN

Player’s rear panel

OUT IN 3

HDMI

IN 2 IN 1

Direction of signal flow

SYSTEM

Caution

• When connected to the TV using a component video cable

(commercially available), video signals are not output with a resolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50p, 720/50p, 1080/24p or 1080/60p.

• Depending on the output video resolution setting, the picture may not be output (page 65).

• Video signals are output with a resolution of 576/50i or 480/60i when connected using a video cable (commercially available) or an S-Video cable (commercially available).

• Connect the player’s video output directly to your TV.

This player supports analog copy protection technology.

Therefore the picture may not be displayed properly if connected to a TV via a DVD recorder/video deck or when playing the player’s output material that is recorded by a DVD recorder/

Receiver subwoofer’s rear panel video deck. Furthermore, the picture may not be displayed properly due to the copy protection when the player is connected to a TV with a built-in video deck. For details, contact the manufacturer of your TV.

93

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 94 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

06

Connecting the other audio component

Connect to the other audio component in order to enjoy the surround sound of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio or DTS

Digital Surround. For instructions on connecting the TV and speakers to the audio component, refer to the operating instructions of audio component.

This connection is not necessary on this system. Use it to connect a commercially available receiver to listen to 7.1-channel surround sound.

Caution

• For DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals, the DTS Digital Surround signals are converted to linear

PCM for output (page 90).

Note

• Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu according to the type of cable connected (page 62).

• To output video signals from this player, connect using one of the following (not including when connected using an HDMI cable): a component video cable (commercially available), an S-

Video cable (commercially available) or a video cable

(commercially available).

When connecting to a 7.1-channel compatible AV receiver or amplifier – Connect using 4 commercially available audio cables

(diagram below).

When connecting to a 5.1-channel compatible AV receiver or amplifier – Connect using 3 commercially available audio cables

(do not connect to the surround back left and right terminals).

• After connecting, set Audio Output Mode to Multi-channel

(page 82).

L

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER

R

AUDIO OUT ( 7.1 ch ) SUB WOOFER

CONTROL

IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

To multi-channel audio input terminals

Player’s rear panel

R

AUDIO OUT ( 2 ch )

L

L

FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK CENTER

R

AUDIO OUT ( 7.1 ch )

SUB WOOFER

CONTROL

IN

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUT

HDMI OUT

Y

PB

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

PR

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

MI OUT

AV receiver or amplifier

Direction of signal flow

AC IN

Y

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

P B

P R

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

To component video input terminals

94

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 95 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Chapter 7

Additional information

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble or malfunction. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Inspect the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.

Playback

07

Problem

Disc tray does not open.

Check

Is SETUP NAVI displayed?

Remedy

First make the Setup Navigator settings (page 62). The disc tray will not open until the settings have been completed.

It may not be possible to play scratched discs.

Disc does not play.

Disc tray opens automatically.

Is the disc scratched?

Is the disc dirty?

Is the disc properly set in the disc tray?

Is the region number correct?

Clean the disc (page 103).

• Set the disc with the printed side facing up.

• Set the disc properly in the depression in the disc tray.

The region numbers of discs that can be played on this set are as shown below (page 60).

• BDs: “B” (or including “B”) and “ALL”

• DVDs: “2” (or including “2”) and “ALL”

Picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working.

Is the player set in a humid place?

Is NTSC on PAL TV properly set?

There could be condensation inside. Wait for the condensation to dissipate. Do not set the player near an air-conditioner, etc.

(page 102).

• Press  (stop) (LCD page 1) to stop playback, then restart playback.

• If the playback cannot be stopped, press  STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.

• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold

 STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel for over 5 seconds. The power will turn off.

Insert the cable firmly and all the way in.

No picture is displayed or the picture is not displayed properly.

Is the video cable properly connected?

Is the video cable damaged?

Is the input setting on the connected TV or AV receiver or amplifier right?

Are the terminals for outputting video signals properly set?

Is the output video resolution properly set?

Depending on the player’s output video resolution, the picture may not be displayed at all or displayed properly. Use

RESOLUTION / (LCD page 2) to switch to a resolution at which the picture is displayed properly (page 65).

Is the player connected with an HDMI cable other than a High

Speed HDMI™ cable (with a Standard HDMI™ cable)?

Press  STOP while pressing  PLAY on the player’s front panel to restore the video outputs to the factory default settings. After this, use the Setup Navigator to reset the player.

There are some BDs for which the picture will only be output when connected by HDMI cable.

Does the connected TV support the frame rate of the video signal being output by the player?

If the cable is damaged, replace it with a new one.

Read the operating instructions of the connected components and switch to the proper input.

Press VIDEO SEL (LCD page 2) to switch the terminal from which the video signals are output.

If the picture is not displayed when playing a disc with a frame rate that is not supported, the picture will not be displayed even when playback is stopped.

In this case, use the procedure below to switch the frame rate of the video signals output from the player. Eject the disc and close the disc tray. Then, press  OPEN/CLOSE while pressing

 PLAY on the player’s front panel to switch to a frame rate supported by the connected TV.

Set NTSC on PAL TV properly (page 82).

95

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 96 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

96

En

Problem

Picture is stretched.

Aspect ratio cannot be switched.

Check

Is the TV’s aspect ratio properly set?

Is 4:3 Video Out properly set?

Remedy

Read the TV’s operating instructions and set the TV’s aspect ratio properly.

• Set 4:3 Video Out properly (page 82).

• When video signals with a resolution of 1080/50i, 1080/50p,

720/50p, 1080/24p, 1080/60i, 1080/60p or 720/60p are being output from the HDMI OUT terminal or the COMPONENT

VIDEO output terminals, they may be output with an aspect ratio of 16:9 even if TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standard)

(page 65).

Set Output Terminal Priority properly (pages 62 and 89).

Sound and picture are not synchronized.

Picture is disturbed during playback.

Picture is dark.

No picture is displayed or picture is not output in high definition when playing BDs.

No sound is output.

Sound is disturbed.

Is Output Terminal Priority properly set?

• This player supports Macrovision analog copy protection technology. With some TVs (such as with built-in video deck), the picture will not be displayed properly when the copy protected DVD title is played. This is not a malfunction.

• If the player and TV are connected via a DVD recorder/video deck, etc., the picture will not be displayed properly due to analog copy protection. Connect the player and TV directly.

With some content protected discs, it may not be possible to output the video signals from the VIDEO output terminals, the

S-VIDEO output terminal or the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. In this case, connect using an HDMI cable

(page 91).

No sound is output during slow motion play and forward and reverse scanning.

Is the disc played back in slow motion?

Is the disc played back in fast forward or fast reverse?

Is the disc scratched?

The sound may not be output if the disc is scratched.

Is the disc dirty?

Clean the disc (page 103).

Is the player properly connected to the other components (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.)?

• Check that you connect the player to the audio output terminals of a different component, etc.

• Check that you connect the player to the PHONO input terminals of the AV receiver or amplifier, etc.

Are the connected components (AV receiver or amplifier, etc.) properly set?

Read the operating instructions of the connected components and check the volume, input, speaker settings, etc.

Are the audio cables properly connected?

Is the audio cable damaged?

Insert the cables firmly and all the way in.

If the cable is damaged, replace it with a new one.

Multi-channel sound is not output.

Is Audio Output Mode properly set?

Are the speakers properly set?

If Audio Output Mode is set to Multi-channel , the audio signals may not be output properly from the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals (page 82). Set Audio Output Mode to 2

Channel .

Set Speaker Setup properly (page 82).

For some BDs, audio signals are only output from the optical digital audio output terminal or the HDMI output terminal.

Is the AV receiver or amplifier, etc. connected to the HDMI

OUT terminal, the AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals or DIGITAL

OUT (OPTICAL) terminal?

Read the operating instructions of the connected AV receiver or amplifier and check the audio output settings of AV receiver or amplifier.

Is Output Terminal Priority properly set?

Linear PCM (2-channel) audio signals are output from output terminals other than the one set at Audio under Output

Terminal Priority . Set Output Terminal Priority properly

(page 89).

Is the audio output of the connected AV receiver or amplifier, etc., properly set?

Read the operating instructions of the connected AV receiver or amplifier and check the audio output settings of AV receiver or amplifier.

Is multi-channel sound selected?

Use the menu screen or AUDIO to switch the disc’s sound to multi-channel.

Is Audio Out set to audio formats supported by the connected

AV receiver or amplifier?

• Read the operating instructions of the connected AV receiver or amplifier and check the supported audio formats.

• Set Audio Out properly (page 82).

Are Audio Output Mode and Speaker Setup properly set?

• When the AV receiver or amplifier, etc., is connected to the

AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) terminals, set Audio Output Mode to

Multi-channel (page 82).

• Set Speaker Setup properly (page 82).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 97 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Problem

Digital audio signals are not output from the DIGITAL

OUT (OPTICAL) terminals

(analog audio signals are output).

Check Remedy

Is Audio Out set to audio formats supported by the connected

AV receiver or amplifier?

• Read the operating instructions of the connected AV receiver or amplifier and check the supported audio formats.

• Set Audio Out properly (page 82).

Noise can be heard when outputting DTS Digital

Surround signals.

192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals cannot be output from the

OUT (OPTICAL)

DIGITAL

terminals.

Secondary audio or interactive audio is not output.

Sound is fast or slow.

Files recorded on discs cannot be played.

Is the connected AV receiver or amplifier compatible with DTS

Digital Surround?

If an AV receiver or amplifier that is not compatible with DTS

Digital Surround is connected to the DIGITAL OUT terminal, set DTS Out to DTS

PCM . Noise will be heard if DTS Out is set to DTS (page 82).

It is not possible to output 192 kHz or 96 kHz digital audio signals from this player’s DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) terminals.

The signals are automatically converted to under

96 kHz for output.

Is HDMI Audio Out properly set?

Are Dolby Digital Out and DTS Out properly set?

When an HDMI cable is connected, are audio signals being output from devices connected with cables other than HDMI cables?

Is the disc one that is playable on this player?

Set HDMI Audio Out to PCM (page 83).

Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1 , DTS Out to DTS 1

(page 82).

When this player is connected by HDMI cable to a Pioneer AV receiver or amplifier compatible with the PQLS function via

HDMI connection, the PQLS function is activated when playing a music CD (CD-DA). Because of this, the sound output from components other than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast or slow. If this happens, set PQLS to Off (page 83).

Check whether the disc is one that can be played on this player

(page 58).

Is the file one that is playable on this player?

Is the file protected by DRM?

• Check whether the file is one that can be played on this player (page 60).

• Check whether or not the file is damaged.

Files protected by DRM cannot be played (not including DivX

VOD files).

Erase the BDMV data (page 65).

A message indicating low memory (local storage) appears while playing a BD-

ROM disc.

07

97

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 98 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

When connected using an HDMI cable

Problem

HDMI indicator does not light.

No picture is displayed.

Check

Is the input of the connected HDMI device properly set?

Is a DVI device connected?

Is the HDMI indicator lit?

Are the terminals for outputting video signals properly set?

Is the resolution properly set?

Remedy

Read the HDMI device’s operating instructions and set the input properly.

Read the DVI device’s operating instructions and check whether it is compatible with HDCP.

• If the HDMI indicator is not lit, read the HDMI device’s operating instructions and switch to the proper input.

• If the HDMI indicator is lit, use RESOLUTION / (LCD page

2) to switch the output video resolution (page 65).

Press VIDEO SEL (LCD page 2) to switch the HDMI OUT terminal.

Depending on the output video resolution setting, the picture may not be output. Use RESOLUTION / (LCD page 2) to switch the output video resolution (page 65).

Is the HDMI cable properly connected?

Is a DVI device connected?

• Insert the cable firmly and all the way in.

• With some cables, 1080p video signals cannot be properly output.

The picture may not be displayed properly if a DVI device is connected.

Pictures do not display properly on the TV.

Is the HDMI cable damaged?

If the cable is damaged, replace it with a new one.

Change the HDMI Color Space setting (page 83).

No sound is produced.

Is a DVI device connected?

The sound will not be output from the HDMI OUT terminal if a

DVI device is connected. Connect the device to a DIGITAL OUT

(OPTICAL) terminal or the AUDIO OUT (2 ch) terminals.

Connect the HDMI cable properly.

HDMI Control function does not work.

Is the HDMI cable properly connected?

Is the HDMI cable you are using a High Speed HDMI™ cable? Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable. The HDMI Control function may not work properly if HDMI cable other than a High Speed

HDMI™ cable is used.

Is HDMI Control set to On on the player?

Does the connected device support the HDMI Control function?

Set HDMI Control to On on the player (page 83).

• The HDMI Control function will not work with devices manufactured by companies other than Pioneer, even when connected using an HDMI cable.

• The HDMI Control function will not work if devices that do not support the HDMI Control function or devices manufactured by companies other than Pioneer are connected between the

HDMI Control-compatible device and the player.

• The HDMI Control function may not work with certain Flat

Screen TVs.

Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected device.

Is HDMI Control set to On on the connected device?

Are multiple players connected?

Set HDMI Control to On on the connected device. The HDMI

Control function works when HDMI Control is set to On for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.

Once connections and settings of all the devices are finished, be sure to check that the player’s picture is output to the Flat

Screen TV. (Also check after changing the connected devices and connecting and/or disconnecting HDMI cables.) If the player’s picture is not being output to the Flat Screen TV, the

HDMI Control function may not work properly.

For details, refer to the operating instructions of the connected device.

The HDMI Control function may not work if three or more players, including this player, are connected by HDMI cable.

98

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 99 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Others

Problem

The power turns off automatically.

The power turns on automatically.

Inputs of connected TV and this receiver subwoofer, switches automatically.

Check

Is

Is

Is

Auto Power Off

HDMI Control

HDMI Control

set to

set to

set to

On

On

On

?

?

?

Remedy

If Auto Power Off is set to On , the power turns off automatically if no operation is performed for over 30 minutes

(page 84).

The player’s power may turn off together with the power of the connected TV. If you do not want the player’s power to turn off when the TV’s power is turned off, set HDMI Control to Off

(page 83).

The player’s power may turn on together with the power of the connected TV. If you do not want the player’s power to turn on when the TV’s power is turned on, set HDMI Control to Off

(page 83).

Is HDMI Control set to On ?

The inputs of the connected TV or this receiver subwoofer may automatically switch to the player when playback starts on the player or the menu screen (Home Media Gallery, etc.) is displayed. If you do not want the inputs of the connected TV and/or this receiver subwoofer to switch automatically, set

HDMI Control to Off (page 83).

Are you operating the remote control from a point too far away from the display unit?

Operate from within 7 m of the display unit’s remote control sensor.

Player cannot be operated with remote control.

Are the batteries dead?

Settings you have made have been cleared.

• Have you disconnected the power cord while the player’s power was on?

• Has there been a power failure?

Replace the batteries (page 25).

If the power cord is disconnected or there is a power failure while the player’s power is on, the settings you have made may be cleared. Always press  STANDBY/ON on the player’s front panel or  STANDBY/ON on the remote control and check that POWER OFF has turned off from the player’s front panel display before disconnecting the power cord. Be particularly careful when the power cord is connected to the

AC outlet on another device because the player turns off in conjunction with the device. We recommend plugging the power cord into a wall outlet whenever possible.

After a disc is inserted,

Loading stays displayed and playback does not start.

Are there too many files recorded on the disc?

 is displayed in file names, etc.

The DVD layer of BD and DVD hybrid discs cannot be played.

Is Hybrid Disc Playback properly set?

Is Hybrid Disc Playback properly set?

The CD layer of BD and CD hybrid discs cannot be played.

The Hybrid Disc Playback setting cannot be changed

(displayed in gray).

BDMV/BDAV Playback

Priority setting cannot be changed (displayed in gray).

Is a disc set in the disc tray?

Is a disc set in the disc tray?

When a disc on which files are recorded is inserted, depending on the number of files recorded on the disc, loading may take several dozen minutes.

The characters that cannot be displayed on this player are displayed in  .

Set Hybrid Disc Playback to DVD (page 84).

Set

The

The

Hybrid Disc Playback

Hybrid Disc Playback

BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority setting cannot be changed when a disc is set. Remove the disc, then change the setting.

to CD (page 84).

setting cannot be changed when a disc is set. Remove the disc, then change the setting.

07

99

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 100 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table

Language Code Table

Language name (language code), input code

Japanese (ja/jpn), 1001

English (en/eng), 0514

Dzongkha (dz/dzo),

Esperanto (eo/epo),

0426

0515

French (fr/fra), 0618

German (de/deu), 0405

Italian (it/ita), 0920

Spanish (es/spa), 0519

Estonian (et/est),

Basque (eu/eus),

Persian (fa/fas),

Finnish (fi/fin),

0520

0521

0601

0609

Chinese (zh/zho), 2608

Dutch (nl/nld), 1412

Portuguese (pt/por), 1620

Swedish (sv/swe), 1922

Russian (ru/rus), 1821

Korean (ko/kor), 1115

Greek (el/ell), 0512

Afar (aa/aar), 0101

Fijian (fj/fij), 0610

Faroese (fo/fao),

Frisian (fy/fry),

Irish (ga/gle),

Galician (gl/glg),

0615

0625

0701

Scots-Gaelic (gd/gla),

Gujarati (gu/guj),

0712

Guarani (gn/grn),

0704

0714

0721

Abkhazian (ab/abk), 0102

Afrikaans (af/afr), 0106

Amharic (am/amh), 0113

Arabic (ar/ara), 0118

Assamese (as/asm), 0119

Aymara (ay/aym), 0125

Azerbaijani (az/aze), 0126

Bashkir (ba/bak), 0201

Belarusian (be/bel), 0205

Bulgarian (bg/bul), 0207

Bihari (bh/bih), 0208

Bislama (bi/bis), 0209

Bengali (bn/ben), 0214

Tibetan (bo/bod), 0215

Breton (br/bre), 0218

Catalan (ca/cat), 0301

Corsican (co/cos), 0315

Czech (cs/ces), 0319

Welsh (cy/cym), 0325

Danish (da/dan), 0401

Hausa (ha/hau),

Hindi (hi/hin),

Inupiaq (ik/ipk),

Icelandic (is/isl),

Yiddish (ji/yid),

Kazakh (kk/kaz),

0801

0809

Croatian (hr/hrv),

Hebrew (iw/heb),

Javanese (jw/jav),

Georgian (ka/kat),

Khmer (km/khm),

0818

Hungarian (hu/hun),

Armenian (hy/hye),

Interlingua (ia/ina),

Interlingue (ie/ile),

0911

Indonesian (in/ind),

0919

0923

1009

1023

1111

Kalaallisut (kl/kal),

Kannada (kn/kan),

Kashmiri (ks/kas),

Kurdish (ku/kur),

0821

0825

0901

0905

0914

1101

1112

1113

1114

1119

1121

Country/Area Code Table

Country/Area name, input code, Country/Area code

Anguilla, 0109, ai

Antigua and Barbuda, 0107, ag

Argentina, 0118, ar

Armenia, 0113, am

Australia, 0121, au

Austria, 0120, at

Azerbaijan, 0126, az

Bahamas, 0219, bs

Barbados, 0202, bb

Belarus, 0225, by

Belgium, 0205, be

Belize, 0226, bz

Bermuda, 0213, bm

Brazil, 0218, br

Bulgaria, 0207, bg

Canada, 0301, ca

Cayman Islands, 1125, ky

Chile, 0312, cl

China, 0314, cn

Colombia, 0315, co

Croatia, 0818, hr

Cyprus, 0325, cy

Czech Republic, 0326, cz

Denmark, 0411, dk

Dominica, 0413, dm

Dominican Republic, 0415, do

Estonia, 0505, ee

Finland, 0609, fi

France, 0618, fr

Georgia, 0705, ge

Germany, 0405, de

Greece, 0718, gr

Greenland, 0712, gl

Grenada, 0704, gd

Guyana, 0725, gy

Haiti, 0820, ht

Hong Kong, 0811, hk

Hungary, 0821, hu

Iceland, 0919, is

India, 0914, in

Indonesia, 0904, id

Ireland, 0905, ie

Israel, 0912, il

Italy, 0920, it

Jamaica, 1013, jm

Japan, 1016, jp

Kazakhstan, 1126, kz

Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr

Kyrgyzstan, 1107, kg

Latvia, 1222, lv

Kirghiz (ky/kir), 1125

Latin (la/lat), 1201

Lingala (ln/lin), 1214

Lao (lo/lao), 1215

Lithuanian (lt/lit), 1220

Latvian (lv/lav), 1222

Malagasy (mg/mlg), 1307

Maori (mi/mri), 1309

Macedonian (mk/mkd), 1311

Malayalam (ml/mal), 1312

Mongolian (mn/mon), 1314

Moldavian (mo/mol), 1315

Marathi (mr/mar), 1318

Malay (ms/msa), 1319

Maltese (mt/mlt), 1320

Burmese (my/mya), 1325

Nauru (na/nau), 1401

Nepali (ne/nep), 1405

Norwegian (no/nor), 1415

Occitan (oc/oci), 1503

Oromo (om/orm), 1513

Oriya (or/ori), 1518

Panjabi (pa/pan), 1601

Polish (pl/pol), 1612

Pushto (ps/pus), 1619

Quechua (qu/que), 1721

Rhaeto-Romance (rm/roh), 1813

Rundi (rn/run), 1814

Romanian (ro/ron), 1815

Kinyarwanda (rw/kin), 1823

Sanskrit (sa/san), 1901

Sindhi (sd/snd), 1904

Sango (sg/sag), 1907

Serbo-Croatian (sh/scr), 1908

Sinhalese (si/sin), 1909

Slovak (sk/slk), 1911

Slovenian (sl/slv), 1912

Samoan (sm/smo), 1913

Shona (sn/sna), 1914

Somali (so/som), 1915

Albanian (sq/sqi), 1917

Serbian (sr/srp), 1918

Swati (ss/ssw), 1919

Sotho, Southern (st/sot), 1920

Sundanese (su/sun), 1921

Swahili (sw/swa), 1923

Tamil (ta/tam), 2001

Telugu (te/tel), 2005

Tajik (tg/tgk), 2007

Thai (th/tha), 2008

Tigrinya (ti/tir), 2009

Turkmen (tk/tuk), 2011

Tagalog (tl/tgl), 2012

Tswana (tn/tsn), 2014

Tonga (Tonga Islands) (to/ton), 2015

Turkish (tr/tur), 2018

Tsonga (ts/tso), 2019

Tatar (tt/tat), 2020

Twi (tw/twi), 2023

Ukrainian (uk/ukr), 2111

Urdu (ur/urd), 2118

Uzbek (uz/uzb), 2126

Vietnamese (vi/vie), 2209

Volapük (vo/vol), 2215

Wolof (wo/wol), 2315

Xhosa (xh/xho), 2408

Yoruba (yo/yor), 2515

Zulu (zu/zul), 2621

Liechtenstein, 1209, li

Lithuania, 1220, lt

Luxembourg, 1221, lu

Macedonia, the Former Yugoslav

Republic of, 1311, mk

Malaysia, 1325, my

Malta, 1320, mt

Mexico, 1324, mx

Moldova, Republic of, 1304, md

Monaco, 1303, mc

Montserrat, 1319, ms

Netherlands, 1412, nl

New Zealand, 1426, nz

Norway, 1415, no

Pakistan, 1611, pk

Peru, 1605, pe

Philippines, 1608, ph

Poland, 1612, pl

Portugal, 1620, pt

Puerto Rico, 1618, pr

Romania, 1815, ro

Russian Federation, 1821, ru

Saint Kitts and Nevis, 1114, kn

Saint Lucia, 1203, lc

Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, 2203, vc

San Marino, 1913, sm

Singapore, 1907, sg

Slovakia, 1911, sk

Slovenia, 1909, si

Spain, 0519, es

Suriname, 1918, sr

Sweden, 1905, se

Switzerland, 0308, ch

Taiwan, Province of China, 2023, tw

Tajikistan, 2010, tj

Thailand, 2008, th

Trinidad and Tobago, 2020, tt

Tunisia, 2014, tn

Turkey, 2018, tr

Turkmenistan, 2013, tm

Turks and Caicos Islands, 2003, tc

Ukraine, 2101, ua

United Kingdom, 0702, gb

United States, 2119, us

Uruguay, 2125, uy

Uzbekistan, 2126, uz

Venezuela, 2205, ve

Virgin Islands, British, 2207, vg

100

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 101 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Specifications

Model

Type

Rated voltage

Rated frequency

Power consumption

Power consumption (standby)

Weight

External dimensions (including projecting parts)

Tolerable operating temperature

Tolerable operating humidity

Video outputs Video

S-Video

Component video

SBDP-LX08

Blu-ray Disc PLAYER

AC 220 V to 240 V

50 Hz/60 Hz

36 W

0.5 W

6.5 kg

420 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) x 356 mm (D)

+5 °C to +35 °C

5 % to 85 % (no condensation)

1 set, RCA jack (1.0 Vp-p (75

))

1 set, S-Video jack:

Y (luminance): 1.0 Vp-p (75

)

C (color): 0.300 Vp-p (75

, PAL), 0.286 Vp-p (75

, NTSC)

1 set, RCA jacks:

Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75

)

P B , P R : 0.7 Vp-p (75

)

1 set, 19-pin (5V, 150 mA)

Number of channels: 2, RCA jacks

Number of channels: 8, RCA jacks

Audio outputs

HDMI

2-channel (stereo)

7.1-channel (multi-channel: front left/ right, surround left/right, center, surround back left/right, subwoofer)

Audio output level

Frequency response

S/N ratio

Dynamic range

Total harmonic distortion

Wow & flutter

Digital audio outputs Optical

Control Input

200 mVrms (1 kHz, –20 dB)

4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sampling)

115 dB

103 dB

0.0015 %

Below measurable limits (±0.001 % W. PEAK)

1 set, Optical digital jack

1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø)

Note

• The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice.

• This product includes FontAvenue

®

fonts licensed by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

07

101

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 102 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

Cautions on use

Condensation

Moving the player

If you need to move this unit, first remove the disc if there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press  STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication on the front panel display goes off. Wait at least

10 seconds. Lastly, disconnect the power cord.

Never lift or move the unit during playback — discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged.

Place of installation

If the player is moved suddenly from a cold place into a warm room

(in winter, for example) or if the temperature in the room in which the player is installed rises suddenly due to a heater, etc., water droplets (condensation) may form inside (on operating parts and the lens). When condensation is present, the player will not operate properly and playback is not possible. Let the player stand at room temperature for 1 or 2 hours with the power turned on (the time depends on the extent of condensation). The water droplets will dissipate and playback will become possible.

Condensation can also occur in the summer if the player is exposed to the direct wind from an air-conditioner. If this happens, move the player to a different place.

Cleaning the player

Select a stable place near the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected.

Do not place the player on top of a TV or color monitor. Keep it away from cassette decks or other components easily affected by magnetism.

Avoid the following types of places:

• Places exposed to direct sunlight

• Humid or poorly ventilated places

• Extremely hot or cold places

• Places subject to vibration

• Dusty places

• Places exposed to soot, steam or heat (in kitchens, etc.)

Do not place objects on top

Do not place objects on top of the player.

Do not obstruct the ventilation holes

Do not use the player on a shaggy rug, bed, or sofa, and do not cover the player with a cloth, etc. Doing so will prevent heat dissipation and could lead to damage.

Keep away from heat

Do not place the player on top of an amplifier or other device generating heat. When installing in a rack, to avoid the heat generated by the amplifier and other devices, place it on a shelf below the amplifier whenever possible.

Turn the power off when not using the player

Normally, wipe the player with a soft cloth. For tough dirt, apply some neutral detergent diluted in 5 to 6 parts water to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off the dirt, then wipe again with a dry cloth.

Note that getting alcohol, thinner, benzene or insecticide on the player could cause the print and coating to peel off. Also, avoid leaving rubber or vinyl products in contact with the player for long periods of time, as this could damage the cabinet.

When using chemical-impregnated wipes, etc., read the wipe’s cautions carefully.

Unplug the power cord from the power outlet when cleaning the player.

Caution for when the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door

Do not press the OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control to open the disc tray while the glass door is closed. The door will hamper the movement of the disc tray, and the unit could be damaged.

Cleaning the pickup lens

The player’s lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for players are commercially available, we advise against using them since some may damage the lens.

Depending on the conditions of the TV broadcast signals, striped patterns may appear on the screen when the TV is turned on while the player’s power is turned on. This is not a malfunction with the player or TV. If this happens, turn the player’s power off. In the same way, noise may be heard in the sound of a radio.

102

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 103 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Handling discs

Glossary

Do not use damaged (cracked or warped) discs.

Do not scratch the disc’s signal surface or let it get dirty.

Do not load more than one disc into the player at a time.

Do not glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ballpoint pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc.

Storing discs

Always store discs in their cases, and place the cases vertically, avoiding places exposed to high temperature or humidity, direct sunlight or extremely low temperatures.

Be sure to read the cautions included with the disc.

Cleaning discs

It may not be possible to play the disc if there are fingerprints or dust on it. In this case, using a cleaning cloth, etc., to wipe the disc gently from the center toward the outer edge. Do not use a dirty cleaning cloth.

Aspect ratio

The ratio of a TV screen’s width to its height. Conventional TVs have an aspect ratio of 4:3, while high definition (HD) and widescreen TVs have an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Audio language

Multiple audio tracks, for example the original sound and the dubbed sound, can be recorded on BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs. Up to 32 languages (32 audio tracks) can be recorded on BD-ROM discs, up to 8 languages (8 audio tracks) on DVD-Video discs, so you can select the desired language when watching the disc.

AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High

Definition)

The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) digital video camera recorder format recording high-definition onto certain media by using highly efficient codec technologies.

BD-J

With BD-ROMs, it is possible to use Java applications to create highly interactive titles, for example including games.

07

Do not use benzene, thinner or other volatile chemicals. Also do not use record spray or antistatic agents.

For tough dirt, apply some water to a soft cloth, wring out thoroughly, wipe off the dirt, then wipe off the moisture with a dry cloth.

Specially shaped discs

Specially shaped discs (heart-shaped, hexagonal, etc.) cannot be used on this player. Never use such discs, as they will damage the player.

Condensation on discs

If the disc is moved suddenly from a cold place into a warm room (in winter, for example), water droplets (condensation) may form on the disc surface. Discs will not play properly if there is condensation on them. Carefully wipe off the water droplets from the disc surface before using the disc.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

BDAV

Of the BD format, the Audio Visual Format Specifications for HD digital broadcast recording is referred to as BDAV on this player and in this operating instructions.

BDMV

Of the BD format, the Audio Visual Format Specifications designed for pre-packaged high definition (HD) movie contents is referred to as BDMV on this player and in this operating instructions.

Component video output

This video output terminal provides clearer pictures when connected to a TV equipped with component inputs. Component video signals consist of three signals, Y, P B and P R .

Composite video output

Signals mixing the luminance signal (Y) and the color signal (C) so they can be transferred on a single cord are output from this terminal.

103

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 104 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

104

En

Deep Color

This is one of the capabilities of HDMI™. The players supporting

Deep Color can transmit a video signal with a color bit depth of greater than 8 bits per color component. Subtle color gradations can be reproduced when connected to a TV that supports Deep

Color.

DivX

DivX is a media technology developed by DivX, Inc. DivX media files include moving picture data.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is an audio format to record the sound in up to 5.1 channels with a fraction of the amount of data as compared to linear

PCM audio signals.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an audio format for high-definition media. Built on Dolby Digital, it combines the efficiency and flexibility to provide high quality multi-channel audio. With BD-ROMs, up to 7.1 channels of digital sound can be recorded.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an audio format using lossless coding. With BD-

ROMs, up to 8 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits, or up to

6 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits.

DRM

A technology for protecting copyrighted digital data. Digitized movies, images and music retain the same quality even when they are copied or transferred repeatedly. DRM is a technology for restricting the distribution or playback of such digital data without the authorization of the copyright holder.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is an audio format to record 48 kHz/24 bits audio signals in 5.1 channels.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an audio format using lossy coding. It can record 7.1 channels at 96 kHz/24 bits.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an audio format using lossless coding.

With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be recorded at 96 kHz/24 bits, or

5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits.

Dynamic range

This refers to the difference between the maximum and minimum level of the sound. The dynamic range is measured in units of decibels (dB).

When the dynamic range is compressed (Audio DRC), the minimum signal level is increased and the maximum signal level decreased.

This way, the volume of loud sounds such as explosions is reduced, while the sounds with a low level, such as human voices, are easier to listen to.

Frames and fields

A frame is the unit for one of the still pictures which compose motion pictures. One frame consists of a picture of odd lines and a picture of even lines called fields in video signal with interlaced scan method (576i, 1080i, etc.).

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection)

A technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface)

A digital interface standard for next-generation TVs expanding the

DVI (Digital Video Interface) terminal used for example for computer displays. It allows transfer of non-compressed digital video and audio signals (Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-

HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Digital

Surround, MPEG-2 AAC, linear PCM, etc.) with a single connector.

Interactive audio

The audio signals recorded in the titles of BD-ROMs. They include for example the clicking sound made when the menu screen is operated.

Interlaced scan

With this method, one picture is displayed by scanning it twice. The odd lines are displayed in the first pass, the even lines are displayed in the second, to form a single picture (frame). Interlaced scan is indicated in this player and operating instructions by an “i” after the resolution value (for example, 576i).

Linear PCM

This is referred as the audio signals that are not compressed, frequently used for DVD-Video discs containing musicals or music concerts. This can also be indicated “48 kHz/16 bit”, “96 kHz”, etc.

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group)

The name of a family of standards used to encode video and audio signals in a digital compressed format. The video encoding standards include MPEG-1 Video, MPEG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visual,

MPEG-4 AVC, etc. The audio encoding standards include MPEG-1

Audio, MPEG-2 Audio, MPEG-2 AAC, etc.

Multi angle

Up to 9 camera angles can be recorded simultaneously on BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs, letting you watch the same scene from different angles.

Parental Lock

Playback of the contents of some BD-ROM or DVD-Video discs can be restricted, for example for discs containing scenes of violence.

With BD-ROM discs, an age restriction can be set to restrict playback. Playing DVD-Video title can be restricted by setting the parental lock level.

Picture-in-Picture (P-in-P)

This is a function for superimposing a sub video on the main video.

Some BD-ROMs include secondary video, which can be superimposed on the primary video.

Progressive scan

With this method, one picture is consisted of a single picture, without dividing it in two pictures. Progressive scan provides clear pictures with no flicker, in particular for still pictures that contain much text, graphics, or horizontal lines. Progressive scan is indicated in this player and operating instructions by a “p” after the resolution value (for example, 576p).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 105 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Region number

A number assigned to Blu-ray Disc Players, BD-ROM and DVD-

Video discs according to the region in which they are sold. A disc can be played if the region numbers indicated on the disc include the number set for the player or if “ALL” is indicated.

S-Video output

An output terminal for transmitting separate luminance (Y) and color (C) signals over a single cord. It offers clearer pictures than the composite video output.

Secondary audio

Some BD-ROMs include sub audio streams mixed with the main audio. These sub audio streams are called “secondary audio”. On some discs this secondary audio is recorded as the audio for the secondary video.

Secondary video

Some BD-ROMs include sub videos superimposed on the main videos using the Picture-in-Picture function. These sub videos are called “secondary video”.

Subtitle language

This refers to the language of the subtitles often used on movies. Up to 255 languages (255 types of subtitles) can be recorded on BD-

ROM discs, 32 languages (32 types of subtitles) on DVD-Video discs, so you can select the desired subtitle when watching the disc.

VC-1

A video codec developed by Microsoft and standardized by the

Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). Some

BDs include videos encoded in this codec.

07

105

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 106 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

Licenses

106

En

The licenses for the software used on this player are shown below.

libxml2

The MIT License

Copyright © <year> <copyright holders>

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH

THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

OpenSSL

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.

See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected].

OpenSSL License

Copyright © 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3.

All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4.

The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5.

Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6.

Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the

OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY

OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])

All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1.

Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3.

All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4.

If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN

IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

zlib

This software is based in part on zlib see http://www.zlib.net for information.

FreeType2

The FreeType Project LICENSE

2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 107 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Introduction

The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project.

This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least.

This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:

• We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports.('as is' distribution)

• You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us.('royalty-free' usage)

• You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code.('credits')

We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The

FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.

Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text:

Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use.

Legal Terms

0. Definitions

Throughout this license, the terms 'package', 'FreeType Project', and 'FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert

Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the 'FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release.

'You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where 'using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a

'program' or 'executable'. This program is referred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'.

This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this.

The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below.

1. No Warranty

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED 'AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

2. Redistribution

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions:

• Redistribution of source code must retain this license file ('FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files.

• Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us.

However, no fee need be paid to us.

3. Advertising

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission.

We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: 'FreeType

Project', 'FreeType Engine', 'FreeType library', or 'FreeType Distribution'.

As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

4. Contacts

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:

[email protected]

Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.

[email protected]

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.

Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org

libpng

COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:

If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.26, April 2, 2008, are Copyright © 2004, 2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors

Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright © 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright © 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

07

107

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 108 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07 libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright © 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-

0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

1.

The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2.

Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.

3.

This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.

A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).

Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.

Glenn Randers-Pehrson glennrp at users.sourceforge.net

2-Apr-08

libjpg

The Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software

README for release 6b of 27-Mar-1998

This distribution contains the sixth public release of the Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software. You are welcome to redistribute this software and to use it for any purpose, subject to the conditions under LEGAL ISSUES, below.

Serious users of this software (particularly those incorporating it into larger programs) should contact IJG at [email protected] to be added to our electronic mailing list. Mailing list members are notified of updates and have a chance to participate in technical discussions, etc.

This software is the work of Tom Lane, Philip Gladstone, Jim Boucher, Lee Crocker, Julian Minguillon, Luis Ortiz, George Phillips, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge'

Weijers, and other members of the Independent JPEG Group.

IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standards committee.

DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP

This file contains the following sections:

OVERVIEW

LEGAL ISSUES

REFERENCES

General description of JPEG and the IJG software.

Copyright, lack of warranty, terms of distribution.

Where to learn more about JPEG.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS

RELATED SOFTWARE

FILE FORMAT WARS

TO DO

Where to find newer versions of this software.

Other stuff you should get.

Software *not* to get.

Plans for future IJG releases.

Other documentation files in the distribution are:

User documentation:

108

En usage.doc Usage instructions for cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgcom.

*.1 Unix-style man pages for programs (same info as usage.doc).

wizard.doc

change.log

Advanced usage instructions for JPEG wizards only.

Version-to-version change highlights.

Programmer and internal documentation: libjpeg.doc

How to use the JPEG library in your own programs.

example.c

Sample code for calling the JPEG library.

structure.doc

filelist.doc

Overview of the JPEG library's internal structure.

Road map of IJG files.

coderules.doc

Coding style rules --- please read if you contribute code.

Please read at least the files install.doc and usage.doc. Useful information can also be found in the JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article. See ARCHIVE

LOCATIONS below to find out where to obtain the FAQ article.

If you want to understand how the JPEG code works, we suggest reading one or more of the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in roughly the order listed) before diving into the code.

OVERVIEW

This package contains C software to implement JPEG image compression and decompression. JPEG (pronounced "jay-peg") is a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images. JPEG is intended for compressing real-world scenes; line drawings, cartoons and other non-realistic images are not its strong suit. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the output image is not exactly identical to the input image. Hence you must not use JPEG if you have to have identical output bits. However, on typical photographic images, very good compression levels can be obtained with no visible change, and remarkably high compression levels are possible if you can tolerate a low-quality image. For more details, see the references, or just experiment with various compression settings.

This software implements JPEG baseline, extended-sequential, and progressive compression processes. Provision is made for supporting all variants of these processes, although some uncommon parameter settings aren't implemented yet. For legal reasons, we are not distributing code for the arithmetic-coding variants of JPEG; see

LEGAL ISSUES. We have made no provision for supporting the hierarchical or lossless processes defined in the standard.

We provide a set of library routines for reading and writing JPEG image files, plus two sample applications "cjpeg" and "djpeg", which use the library to perform conversion between JPEG and some other popular image file formats. The library is intended to be reused in other applications.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 109 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

In order to support file conversion and viewing software, we have included considerable functionality beyond the bare JPEG coding/decoding capability; for example, the color quantization modules are not strictly part of JPEG decoding, but they are essential for output to colormapped file formats or colormapped displays. These extra functions can be compiled out of the library if not required for a particular application. We have also included jpegtran, a utility for lossless transcoding between different

JPEG processes, and "rdjpgcom" and "wrjpgcom", two simple applications for inserting and extracting textual comments in JFIF files.

The emphasis in designing this software has been on achieving portability and flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be useful. In particular, the software is not intended to be read as a tutorial on JPEG. (See the REFERENCES section for introductory material.) Rather, it is intended to be reliable, portable, industrial-strength code.

We do not claim to have achieved that goal in every aspect of the software, but we strive for it.

We welcome the use of this software as a component of commercial products. No royalty is required, but we do ask for an acknowledgement in product documentation, as described under LEGAL ISSUES.

LEGAL ISSUES

In plain English:

1.

We don't promise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs, please let us know!)

2.

You can use this software for whatever you want. You don't have to pay us.

3.

You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the IJG code.

In legalese:

The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy.

This software is copyright © 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified below.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:

(1) If any part of the source code for this software is distributed, then this README file must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.

(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that "this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG

Group".

(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.

Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author's name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This software may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software".

We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.

ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is

NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must include source code if you redistribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.) However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code, this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do.

The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.

It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software. (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it.) So far as we are aware, there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code.

The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce uncompressed GIFs. This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are readable by all standard GIF decoders.

We are required to state that

"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated."

REFERENCES

We highly recommend reading one or more of these references before trying to understand the innards of the JPEG software.

The best short technical introduction to the JPEG compression algorithm is

Wallace, Gregory K. "The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard",

Communications of the ACM, April 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp. 30-44.

(Adjacent articles in that issue discuss MPEG motion picture compression, applications of JPEG, and related topics.) If you don't have the CACM issue handy, a PostScript file containing a revised version of Wallace's article is available at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/wallace.ps.gz. The file (actually a preprint for an article that appeared in

IEEE Trans. Consumer Electronics) omits the sample images that appeared in CACM, but it includes corrections and some added material. Note: the Wallace article is copyright ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used for commercial purposes.

A somewhat less technical, more leisurely introduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Compression Book by Mark Nelson and Jean-loup Gailly, published by M&T

Books (New York), 2nd ed. 1996, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. This book provides good explanations and example C code for a multitude of compression methods including JPEG.

It is an excellent source if you are comfortable reading C code but don't know much about data compression in general. The book's JPEG sample code is far from industrialstrength, but when you are ready to look at a full implementation, you've got one here...

The best full description of JPEG is the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data Compression Standard" by William B. Pennebaker and Joan L. Mitchell, published by Van Nostrand

Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0-442-01272-1. Price US$59.95, 638 pp. The book includes the complete text of the ISO JPEG standards (DIS 10918-1 and draft DIS 10918-2). This is by far the most complete exposition of JPEG in existence, and we highly recommend it.

The JPEG standard itself is not available electronically; you must order a paper copy through ISO or ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a certified official copy, we recommend buying the Pennebaker and Mitchell book instead; it's much cheaper and includes a great deal of useful explanatory material.) In the USA, copies of the standard may be ordered from ANSI Sales at (212) 642-4900, or from Global Engineering Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn't take credit card orders, but Global does.) It's not cheap: as of 1992, ANSI was charging $95 for Part 1 and $47 for Part 2, plus 7% shipping/handling. The standard is divided into two parts, Part 1 being the actual specification, while Part 2 covers compliance testing methods. Part 1 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images, Part 1:

Requirements and guidelines" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T.81. Part 2 is titled "Digital Compression and Coding of Continuous-tone Still Images,

Part 2: Compliance testing" and has document numbers ISO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T.83.

Some extensions to the original JPEG standard are defined in JPEG Part 3, a newer ISO standard numbered ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU-T T.84. IJG currently does not support any Part 3 extensions.

The JPEG standard does not specify all details of an interchangeable file format. For the omitted details we follow the "JFIF" conventions, revision 1.02. A copy of the JFIF spec is available from:

Literature Department

C-Cube Microsystems, Inc.

1778 McCarthy Blvd.

Milpitas, CA 95035 phone (408) 944-6300, fax (408) 944-6314

A PostScript version of this document is available by FTP at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jfif.ps.gz. There is also a plain text version at ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/ jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figures.

07

109

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 110 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

110

En

The TIFF 6.0 file format specification can be obtained by FTP from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/TIFF6.ps.gz. The JPEG incorporation scheme found in the TIFF 6.0 spec of

3-June-92 has a number of serious problems. IJG does not recommend use of the TIFF 6.0 design (TIFF Compression tag 6). Instead, we recommend the JPEG design proposed by TIFF Technical Note #2 (Compression tag 7). Copies of this Note can be obtained from ftp.sgi.com or from ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/. It is expected that the next revision of the TIFF spec will replace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note's design. Although IJG's own code does not support TIFF/JPEG, the free libtiff library uses our library to implement TIFF/JPEG per the Note. libtiff is available from ftp://ftp.sgi.com/graphics/tiff/.

ARCHIVE LOCATIONS

The "official" archive site for this software is ftp.uu.net (Internet address 192.48.96.9). The most recent released version can always be found there in directory graphics/ jpeg. This particular version will be archived as ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz. If you don't have direct Internet access, UUNET's archives are also available via UUCP; contact [email protected] for information on retrieving files that way.

Numerous Internet sites maintain copies of the UUNET files. However, only ftp.uu.net is guaranteed to have the latest official version.

You can also obtain this software in DOS-compatible "zip" archive format from the SimTel archives (ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/graphics/), or on CompuServe in the Graphics Support forum (GO CIS:GRAPHSUP), library 12 JPEG Tools. Again, these versions may sometimes lag behind the ftp.uu.net release.

The JPEG FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) article is a useful source of general information about JPEG. It is updated constantly and therefore is not included in this distribution. The FAQ is posted every two weeks to Usenet newsgroups comp.graphics.misc, news.answers, and other groups. It is available on the World Wide Web at http://www.faqs.org/faqs/jpeg-faq/ and other news.answers archive sites, including the official news.answers archive at rtfm.mit.edu: ftp://rtfm.mit.edu/pub/usenet/ news.answers/jpeg-faq/. If you don't have Web or FTP access, send e-mail to [email protected] with body send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part1 send usenet/news.answers/jpeg-faq/part2

RELATED SOFTWARE

Numerous viewing and image manipulation programs now support JPEG. (Quite a few of them use this library to do so.) The JPEG FAQ described above lists some of the more popular free and shareware viewers, and tells where to obtain them on Internet.

If you are on a Unix machine, we highly recommend Jef Poskanzer's free PBMPLUS software, which provides many useful operations on PPM-format image files. In particular, it can convert PPM images to and from a wide range of other formats, thus making cjpeg/djpeg considerably more useful. The latest version is distributed by the NetPBM group, and is available from numerous sites, notably ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/graphics/graphics/packages/NetPBM/. Unfortunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nearly as portable as the IJG software is; you are likely to have difficulty making it work on any non-Unix machine.

A different free JPEG implementation, written by the PVRG group at Stanford, is available from ftp://havefun.stanford.edu/pub/jpeg/. This program is designed for research and experimentation rather than production use; it is slower, harder to use, and less portable than the IJG code, but it is easier to read and modify. Also, the PVRG code supports lossless JPEG, which we do not. (On the other hand, it doesn't do progressive JPEG.)

FILE FORMAT WARS

Some JPEG programs produce files that are not compatible with our library. The root of the problem is that the ISO JPEG committee failed to specify a concrete file format.

Some vendors "filled in the blanks" on their own, creating proprietary formats that no one else could read. (For example, none of the early commercial JPEG implementations for the Macintosh were able to exchange compressed files.)

The file format we have adopted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This format has been agreed to by a number of major commercial JPEG vendors, and it has become the de facto standard. JFIF is a minimal or "low end" representation. We recommend the use of TIFF/JPEG (TIFF revision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technical Note #2) for

"high end" applications that need to record a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fairly new and not yet widely supported, unfortunately.

The upcoming JPEG Part 3 standard defines a file format called SPIFF. SPIFF is interoperable with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decoders should be able to read the most common variant of SPIFF. SPIFF has some technical advantages over JFIF, but its major claim to fame is simply that it is an official standard rather than an informal one. At this point it is unclear whether SPIFF will supersede JFIF or whether JFIF will remain the de-facto standard. IJG intends to support SPIFF once the standard is frozen, but we have not decided whether it should become our default output format or not. (In any case, our decoder will remain capable of reading JFIF indefinitely.)

Various proprietary file formats incorporating JPEG compression also exist. We have little or no sympathy for the existence of these formats. Indeed, one of the original reasons for developing this free software was to help force convergence on common, open format standards for JPEG files. Don't use a proprietary file format!

TO DO

The major thrust for v7 will probably be improvement of visual quality. The current method for scaling the quantization tables is known not to be very good at low Q values.

We also intend to investigate block boundary smoothing, "poor man's variable quantization", and other means of improving quality-vs-file-size performance without sacrificing compatibility.

In future versions, we are considering supporting some of the upcoming JPEG Part 3 extensions --- principally, variable quantization and the SPIFF file format.

As always, speeding things up is of great interest.

Please send bug reports, offers of help, etc. to [email protected].

AVC/H.264

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE

VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (”AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A

PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. No LICENSE IS GRANTED

OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 111 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0.

This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General

Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.

(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).

Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1.

You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2.

You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3.

You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4.

You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

5.

You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the

Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

6.

Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.

You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

7.

If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8.

If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9.

The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

07

111

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 112 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

112

En

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.

EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY

OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE

DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY

AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING

RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),

EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>

Copyright © <year> <name of author>

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software

Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,

Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright © year name of author

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.

The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items - whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.

GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages - typically libraries - of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public

License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 113 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0.

This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".

A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

1.

You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2.

You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3.

You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version

2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.

4.

You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5.

A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6.

As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified

Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

07

113

En

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 114 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

07

114

En d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.

However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

7.

You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

8.

You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9.

You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the

Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you

(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT

WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME

THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY

AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING

RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE),

EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>

Copyright © <year> <name of author>

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,

Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990

Ty Coon, President of Vice

That's all there is to it!

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

LX01BD_2.book Page 115 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

[Notice on GNU General Public License]

This product include the software licensed for use under the terms of a GNU General Public License. A copy of the corresponding source code can be obtained by being charged the fee for distribution.

To obtain a copy, contact your local Pioneer Customer Support Center.

See the GNU website (http://www.gnu.org) for details of the GNU General Public License.

07

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

115

En

LX01BD_2.book Page 116 Friday, September 5, 2008 11:29 AM

Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu)

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

K002_B_En

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation.

All rights reserved.

<ARB7406-A>

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com

manuals search engine

Printed in Malaysia

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents